Hitachi Microcomputer Support Software

SuperH RISC Engine
Assembler
User’s Manual

ADE-702-090C
Rev. 4.0
11/4/98
Hitachi, Ltd.
McS-Setsu

Cautions
1. Hitachi neither warrants nor grants licenses of any rights of Hitachi’s or any third party’s
patent, copyright, trademark, or other intellectual property rights for information contained inthis document. Hitachi bears no responsibility for problems that may arise with third party’s
rights, including intellectual property rights, in connection with use of the information
contained in this document.
2. Products and product specifications may be subject to change without notice. Confirm that you
have received the latest product standards or specifications before final design, purchase oruse.
3. Hitachi makes every attempt to ensure that its products are of high quality and reliability.
However, contact Hitachi’s sales office before using the product in an application thatdemands especially high quality and reliability or where its failure or malfunction may directly
threaten human life or cause risk of bodily injury, such as aerospace, aeronautics, nuclear
power, combustion control, transportation, traffic, safety equipment or medical equipment forlife support.
4. Design your application so that the product is used within the ranges guaranteed by Hitachi
particularly for maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, heat radiation characteristics,
installation conditions and other characteristics. Hitachi bears no responsibility for failure ordamage when used beyond the guaranteed ranges. Even within the guaranteed ranges,
consider normally foreseeable failure rates or failure modes in semiconductor devices andemploy systemic measures such as fail-safes, so that the equipment incorporating Hitachi
product does not cause bodily injury, fire or other consequential damage due to operation of
the Hitachi product.
5. This product is not designed to be radiation resistant.
6. No one is permitted to reproduce or duplicate, in any form, the whole or part of this document
without written approval from Hitachi.
7. Contact Hitachi’s sales office for any questions regarding this document or Hitachi
semiconductor products.

Preface
This manual describes the SuperH RISC Engine Assembler (hereafter referred to as theassembler), which supports development of programs for Hitachi SuperH RISC engine family(hereafter referred to as microprocessor).
This manual is organized as follows:
Overview:
Gives an overview of the functions of the assembler.
Programmer's Guide: Describes the assembly language syntax and programming techniques.
User's Guide:
Describes the use (invocation) of the assembler program itself and thecommand line options.
Appendix:
Describes assembler limitations and error messages.
Read this manual and fully understand its mechanisim before use of the assembler.
For information concerning the related hardware and software, read the corresponding manuals
and understand their mechanisims before use.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page v of 15

Notes:• The following symbols have special meanings in this manual.
<item>: <specification item>∆:

Blank space(s) or tab(s)%:The OS prompt (indicates the input waiting state)(RET):

Press the Return (Enter) key.

... :The preceding item can be repeated.

[ ]:The enclosed item is optional (i.e., can be omitted.)• Numbers are written as follows in this manual.
Binary:A prefix of “ B' ” is used.

Octal:A prefix of “ Q' ” is used.

Decimal:A prefix of “ D' ” is used.
Hexadecimal: A prefix of “ H' ” is used.
However, when there is no specification, the number without a prefix is decimal.

Windows95 and WindowsNT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively
through X/Open Company Limited.
SPARC is a CPU and workstation administered by SPARC International, Inc.
HP9000/700 series is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
PC-9800 series is a trademark of NEC Corporation.
IBM PC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page vi of 15

Contents
Overview
Section 1

Overview ...........................................................................................................

3

Section 2

Relationships between the Software Development Support
Tools ...................................................................................................................

5

Programmer’s Guide
Section 1
1.1

1.2
1.3

1.4

1.5
1.6

1.7
1.8

Program Elements ..........................................................................................
Source Statements .............................................................................................................
1.1.1 Source Statement Structure ..................................................................................
1.1.2 Coding of Source Statements ...............................................................................
1.1.3 Coding of Source Statements across Multiple Lines............................................
Reserved Words ................................................................................................................
Symbols.............................................................................................................................
1.3.1 Functions of Symbols...........................................................................................
1.3.2 Coding of Symbols...............................................................................................
Constants ...........................................................................................................................
1.4.1 Integer Constants..................................................................................................
1.4.2 Character Constants..............................................................................................
1.4.3 Floating-Point Constants ......................................................................................
1.4.4 Fixed-Point Constants ..........................................................................................
Location Counter...............................................................................................................
Expressions........................................................................................................................
1.6.1 Elements of Expression ........................................................................................
1.6.2 Operation Precedence...........................................................................................
1.6.3 Detailed Description on Operation.......................................................................
1.6.4 Notes on Expressions ...........................................................................................
Character Strings ...............................................................................................................
Local Label........................................................................................................................
1.8.1 Local Label Functions..........................................................................................
1.8.2 Description Method of Local Label .....................................................................
1.8.3 Scope of Local Labels ..........................................................................................

Section 2
2.1

11
11
11
13
15
16
16
16
18
19
19
20
21
26
29
31
31
33
36
39
40
42
42
43
43

Basic Programming Knowledge................................................................. 45

Sections ............................................................................................................................. 45
2.1.1 Section Types by Usage ....................................................................................... 45
2.1.2 Absolute Address Sections and Relative Address Sections.................................. 50

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page vii of 15

2.2

2.3

2.4

Absolute and Relative Values ...........................................................................................
2.2.1 Absolute Values ...................................................................................................
2.2.2 Relative Values ....................................................................................................
Symbol Definition and Reference .....................................................................................
2.3.1 Symbol Definition ................................................................................................
2.3.2 Symbol Reference ................................................................................................
Separate Assembly ............................................................................................................
2.4.1 Separate Assembly ...............................................................................................
2.4.2 Declaration of Export Symbols and Import Symbols...........................................

Section 3
3.1
3.2

Executable Instructions .................................................................................
Overview of Executable Instructions ................................................................................
Notes on Executable Instructions ......................................................................................
3.2.1 Notes on the Operation Size.................................................................................
3.2.2 Notes on Delayed Branch Instructions .................................................................
3.2.3 Notes on Address Calculations.............................................................................

Section 4
4.1

4.2

61
61
67
67
84
86

DSP Instructions ............................................................................................. 91

Program Contents ..............................................................................................................
4.1.1 Source Statements ................................................................................................
4.1.2 Parallel Operation Instructions.............................................................................
4.1.3 Data Move Instructions ........................................................................................
4.1.4 Coding of Source Statements Across Multiple Lines...........................................
DSP Instructions................................................................................................................
4.2.1 DSP Operation Instructions..................................................................................
4.2.2 Data Move Instructions ........................................................................................

Section 5
5.1
5.2

52
52
52
53
53
55
57
57
58

91
91
92
93
94
95
95
99

Assembler Directives..................................................................................... 103
Overview of the Assembler Directives.............................................................................. 103
Assembler Directive Reference ......................................................................................... 105
5.2.1 Target CPU Assembler Directive......................................................................... 105.CPU .................................................................................................................... 106
5.2.2 Section and Location Counter Assembler Directives........................................... 108.SECTION........................................................................................................... 109.ORG .................................................................................................................... 114.ALIGN ............................................................................................................... 116
5.2.3 Symbol Handling Assembler Directives .............................................................. 118.EQU .................................................................................................................... 119.ASSIGN ............................................................................................................. 121.REG .................................................................................................................... 123.FREG.................................................................................................................. 125
5.2.4 Data and Data Area Reservation Assembler Directives ....................................... 127.DATA.................................................................................................................. 128

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page viii of 15

5.2.5

5.2.6

5.2.7

5.2.8

.DATAB ............................................................................................................... 130.SDATA ............................................................................................................... 133.SDATAB ............................................................................................................. 135.SDATAC ............................................................................................................. 138.SDATAZ ............................................................................................................. 140.FDATA ............................................................................................................... 142.FDATAB ............................................................................................................. 144.XDATA ............................................................................................................... 147.RES .................................................................................................................... 149.SRES.................................................................................................................. 152.SRESC ............................................................................................................... 154.SRESZ ............................................................................................................... 156.FRES.................................................................................................................. 158
Export and Import Assembler Directives ............................................................. 160.EXPORT ............................................................................................................. 161.IMPORT ............................................................................................................. 163.GLOBAL ............................................................................................................. 165
Object Module Assembler Directives .................................................................. 167.OUTPUT ............................................................................................................. 168.DEBUG ............................................................................................................... 171.ENDIAN ............................................................................................................. 173.LINE.................................................................................................................. 176
Assemble Listing Assembler Directives............................................................... 178.PRINT ............................................................................................................... 179.LIST.................................................................................................................. 181.FORM.................................................................................................................. 185.HEADING........................................................................................................... 187.PAGE.................................................................................................................. 189.SPACE ............................................................................................................... 191
Other Assembler Directives ................................................................................. 193.PROGRAM........................................................................................................... 194.RADIX ............................................................................................................... 196.END .................................................................................................................... 198

Section 6

File Inclusion Function ................................................................................. 201.INCLUDE........................................................................................................... 202

Section 7

Conditional Assembly Function ................................................................. 205

7.1

Overview of the Conditional Assembly Function ............................................................. 205
7.1.1 Preprocessor variables.......................................................................................... 205
7.1.2 Replacement Symbols .......................................................................................... 206
7.1.3 Conditional Assembly .......................................................................................... 207
7.1.4 Iterated Expansion................................................................................................ 209
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page ix of 15

7.2

7.1.5 Conditional Iterated Expansion ............................................................................ 210
Conditional Assembly Directives...................................................................................... 211.ASSIGNA........................................................................................................... 212.ASSIGNC........................................................................................................... 215.DEFINE ............................................................................................................. 217.AIF, .AELIF, .AELSE, .AENDI ........................................................... 219.AIFDEF, .AELSE, .AENDI....................................................................... 222.AREPEAT, .AENDR........................................................................................ 224.AWHILE, .AENDW .......................................................................................... 226.AERROR ............................................................................................................. 229.EXITM ............................................................................................................... 231.ALIMIT ............................................................................................................. 233

Section 8
8.1
8.2

8.3
8.4
8.5

Overview of the Macro Function ...................................................................................... 235
Macro Function Directives ................................................................................................ 237.MACRO, .ENDM............................................................................................... 238.EXITM ............................................................................................................... 241
Macro Body....................................................................................................................... 243
Macro Call......................................................................................................................... 247
Character String Manipulation Functions.......................................................................... 249.LEN .................................................................................................................... 250.INSTR ............................................................................................................... 252.SUBSTR ............................................................................................................. 254

Section 9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4

9.5
9.6
9.7

Macro Function ............................................................................................... 235

Automatic Literal Pool Generation Function ......................................... 257

Overview of Automatic Literal Pool Generation............................................................... 257
Extended Instructions Related to Automatic Literal Pool Generation............................... 258
Size Mode for Automatic Literal Pool Generation............................................................ 258
Literal Pool Output............................................................................................................ 260
9.4.1 Literal Pool Output after Unconditional Branch .................................................. 261
9.4.2 Literal Pool Output to the .POOL Location ......................................................... 262
Literal Sharing................................................................................................................... 264
Literal Pool Output Suppression ....................................................................................... 266
Notes on Automatic Literal Pool Output........................................................................... 267

Section 10 Automatic Repeat Loop Generation Function ....................................... 271
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5

Overview of Automatic Repeat Loop Generation Function .............................................. 271
Extended Instructions of Automatic Repeat Loop Generation Function........................... 272
REPEAT Description ........................................................................................................ 272
Coding Examples .............................................................................................................. 274
Notes on the REPEAT Extended Instruction .................................................................... 277

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page x of 15

User’s Guide
Section 1
1.1
1.2
1.3

Executing the Assembler .............................................................................. 281
Command Line Format ..................................................................................................... 281
File Specification Format .................................................................................................. 282
SHCPU Environment Variable.......................................................................................... 283

Section 2
2.1
2.2

Command Line Options................................................................................ 285
Overview of Command Line Options ............................................................................... 285
Command Line Option Reference..................................................................................... 287
2.2.1 Target CPU Command Line Option..................................................................... 287–CPU .................................................................................................................... 288
2.2.2 Object Module Command Line Options .............................................................. 289–OBJECT, –NOOBJECT................................................................................... 290–DEBUG, –NODEBUG........................................................................................ 292–ENDIAN ............................................................................................................. 294
2.2.3 Assembly Listing Command Line Options .......................................................... 295–LIST, –NOLIST ............................................................................................ 296–SOURCE, –NOSOURCE................................................................................... 298–CROSS_REFERENCE, –NOCROSS_REFERENCE........................................ 300–SECTION, –NOSECTION .............................................................................. 302–SHOW, –NOSHOW ............................................................................................ 304–LINES ............................................................................................................... 306–COLUMNS........................................................................................................... 307
2.2.4 File Inclusion Function Command Line Option................................................... 308–INCLUDE........................................................................................................... 309
2.2.5 Conditional Assembly Command Line Options................................................... 310–ASSIGNA........................................................................................................... 311–ASSIGNC........................................................................................................... 313–DEFINE ............................................................................................................. 315
2.2.6 Assembler Execution Command Line Option...................................................... 316–EXPAND ............................................................................................................. 317–ABORT ............................................................................................................... 318
2.2.7 Japanese Character Description Command Line Options .................................... 319–SJIS.................................................................................................................. 320–EUC .................................................................................................................... 321–OUTCODE........................................................................................................... 322
2.2.8 Automatic Literal Pool Generation Command Line Option................................. 323–AUTO_LITERAL............................................................................................... 324
2.2.9 Command Line Input Command Line Option...................................................... 326–SUBCOMMAND ................................................................................................... 327

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page xi of 15

2.2.10 Floating-Point Data Command Line Options....................................................... 329–ROUND ............................................................................................................... 330–DENORMALIZE ................................................................................................. 332

Appendix
Appendix A Limitations and Notes on Programming ............................................... 337
Appendix B Sample Program ........................................................................................... 338
B.1
B.2

Sample Program Specifications......................................................................................... 338
Coding Example ................................................................................................................ 339

Appendix C Assemble Listing Output Example ......................................................... 341
C.1
C.2
C.3

Source Program Listing..................................................................................................... 342
Cross-Reference Listing .................................................................................................... 344
Section Information Listing............................................................................................... 345

Appendix D Error Messages ............................................................................................. 346
D.1
D.2

Error Types........................................................................................................................ 346
Error Message Tables........................................................................................................ 349

Appendix E Differences from Version 3.1 ................................................................... 371
E.1
E.2
E.3
E.4
E.5

CPU .................................................................................................................................. 371
Object Format.................................................................................................................... 371
Constants ........................................................................................................................... 372
Changed Assembler Directives ......................................................................................... 372
Added Command Line Options......................................................................................... 372

Appendix F ASCII Code Table........................................................................................ 374

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page xii of 15

Figures
Overview
Figure 1-1
Figure 2-1

Function of the Assembler......................................................................................
Relationships between the Software Development Support Tools .........................

Programmer’s Guide
Figure 2-1 Memory Reservation of Common Section .............................................................
Figure 2-2 Data Structure Example Using Dummy Section ....................................................
Figure 2-3 Meaning of the Terms Forward and Backward ......................................................
Figure 2-4 Meaning of the Term External................................................................................
Figure 2-5 Relationship between the Changed Range of the Source Program andthe Range of the Program that must be Reassembled .............................................
Figure 3-1 Address Calculation Example (Normal Case) ........................................................
Figure 3-2 Address Calculation Example (When the Value of PC Differs Due to a Branch) ..
Figure 3-3 Address Calculation Example (When Microprocessor Corrects
the Value of PC) ....................................................................................................
Figure 3-4 Address Calculation Example (When Microprocessor Does Not Correct
the Value of PC) .....................................................................................................
Appendix
Figure C-1
Figure C-2
Figure C-3

4
6

47
49
55
55
57
86
87
88
88

Source Program Listing Output Example ............................................................... 342
Cross-Reference Listing Output Example .............................................................. 344
Section Information Listing Output Example......................................................... 345

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page xiii of 15

Tables
Programmer’s Guide
Table 1-1
Floating-Point Data Types...................................................................................... 22
Table 1-2
Data Types and Numerical Value Ranges (Absolute Value).................................. 23
Table 1-3
Data Format Size .................................................................................................... 24
Table 1-4
Floating-Point Representation for Each Data Type ................................................ 25
Table 1-5
Operators ................................................................................................................ 31
Table 1-6
Operator Precedence and Association Rules .......................................................... 33
Table 1-7
Even/Odd Operations.............................................................................................. 38
Table 3-1
Addressing Modes .................................................................................................. 62
Table 3-2
Allowed Displacement Values................................................................................ 64
Table 3-3
Allowed Immediate Values .................................................................................... 66
Table 3-4
SH-1 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations ........................... 67
Table 3-5
SH-2 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations ........................... 73
Table 3-6
SH-2E Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations ......................... 74
Table 3-7
SH-3 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations ........................... 76
Table 3-8
SH-3E Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations ......................... 78
Table 3-9
SH-4 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations ........................... 80
Table 3-10 SH-DSP, SH3-DSP Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations .... 83
Table 3-11 Relationship between Delayed Branch Instructions and Delay Slot Instructions ... 85
Table 4-1
DSP Instructions in Mnemonic............................................................................... 95
Table 4-2
Addressing Modes for DSP Operation Instructions................................................ 95
Table 4-3
Registers that Can Be Specified in DSP Register Direct Addressing Mode........... 96
Table 4-4
Ranges of Immediate Data...................................................................................... 96
Table 4-5
DSP Operation Instructions .................................................................................... 98
Table 4-6
Data Move Instructions in Mnemonic .................................................................... 99
Table 4-7
Addressing Modes of Data Move Instructions ....................................................... 100
Table 4-8
Registers that Can Be Specified in Addressing Modes for Data MoveInstructions ............................................................................................................. 101
Table 4-9
Data Move Instructions........................................................................................... 102
Table 5-1
Assembler Directives.............................................................................................. 103
Table 9-1
Extended Instructions and Expanded Results ......................................................... 258
Table 9-2
Data Move Instructions and Size Mode.................................................................. 258
Table 9-3
Instructions Selected in Size Selection Mode......................................................... 259
Table 10-1 Repeat Loop Instructions and Address Setting ....................................................... 271
Table 10-2 Extended Instructions and Expanded Results ......................................................... 272
User’s Guide
Table 2-1
Command Line Options.......................................................................................... 285

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page xiv of 15

Appendix
Table A-1
Table D-1
Table D-2
Table D-3
Table D-4
Table E-1
Table E-2
Table F-1

Limitations and Notes on Programming ................................................................. 337
Command Error Messages...................................................................................... 349
Source Program Error Messages............................................................................. 350
Source Program Warning Messages ....................................................................... 362
Fatal Error Messages .............................................................................................. 368
Changed Assembler Directives and Statements...................................................... 372
Added Command Line Options .............................................................................. 372
ASCII Code Table .................................................................................................. 374

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page xv of 15

OverviewSection 1 Overview
The assembler converts source programs written in assembly language into a format that can behandled by microprocessors, and outputs the result as an object module. Also, the results of theassembly processing are output as an assemble listing.
This assembler provides the following functions to support efficient program development:• Assembler directives
Give the assembler various instructions.
• File inclusion function
Includes files into a source file.
• Conditional assembly function
Selects source statements to be assembled or repeats assembly according to a specified
condition.
• Macro function
Gives a name to a sequence of statements and defines it as one instruction.
• Automatic literal pool generation function
Interprets data transfer instructions MOV.W #imm, MOV.L #imm, and MOVA #imm that are
not provided by the SuperH RISC engine family as extended instructions and expands theminto microprocessor executable instructions and constant data (literals).
• Automatic repeat loop generation function
Interprets instruction REPEAT that is not provided by the SH-DSP as an extended instructionand expands it into SH-DSP repeat loop instructions (LDRS, LDRE, and SETRC) that control
the repeat loop characteristic of the SH-DSP.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 3 of 391

Figure 1-1 shows the function of the assembler.

Assembly-language
source program

File inclusion

Assembler

Object module• Assembler directives• Conditional assembly• Macro• Automatic literal pool generation• Automatic repeat loop generation

Assemble listing

Figure 1-1 Function of the Assembler

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 4 of 391

Included fileSection 2 Relationships between the Software
Development Support Tools
In addition to the assembler, software development support tools, such as the C/C++ compiler,
linkage editor, librarian, object converter, and simulator/debugger are available for the SuperH
RISC engine family.
These tools assist in the efficient development of application software.
Figure 2-1 shows the relationships between the software development support tools.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 5 of 391

Editor

C/C++-language
source program
Assembly-language
source program
C/C++ compiler

Assembler

Librarian

CPU information analyzer
ObjectmoduleCPU
information
fileLinkage editor

Libraryfile

LoadmoduleObject converter

Simulator/debugger

S-type-format
load module

Figure 2-1 Relationships between the Software Development Support Tools

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 6 of 391

Supplement:
Use a general purpose editor (a text editor) to edit source programs.
The C/C++ compiler converts programs written in the C/C++ language into either object modules
or assembly-language source programs.
The librarian converts object modules and relocatable load modules into library files. We
recommend handling processing that is common to multiple programs as a library file. (This has
several advantages, including allowing modules to be easily managed.)
The linkage editor links together object modules and library files to produce load modules(executable programs).
The object converter converts load modules into the S-type format. (The S-type format is astandard load module format.)
The simulator/debugger assists debugging microprocessor software.
Load modules created by this development support system can be input to several types ofemulator. (Emulators are systems for debugging microprocessor system hardware and software.)Also, S-type-format load modules can be input into most EPROM programmers.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 7 of 391

Programmer’s Guide

Section 1 Program Elements
1.1

Source Statements?If source programs are compared to natural language writing, a source statement will correspondto "a sentence." The "words" that make up a source statement are reserved words and symbols.
1.1.1

Source Statement Structure

The following shows the structure of a source statement.

[<label>] [∆<operation>[∆<operand(s)>]] [<comment>]

Example:~LABEL1:

MOV.L@R0,R1; This is an example of a source statement.

~

Comment
Operands
Operation
Label

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 11 of 391

(1) Label
A symbol or a local symbol is written as a tag attached to a source statement.
A symbol is a name defined by the programmer.
(2) Operation
The mnemonic of an executable instruction, an extended instruction, a DSP instruction, an
assembler directive, or a directive statement is written as the operation.
Executable instructions must be microprocessor instructions.
Extended instructions are instructions that are expanded into executable instructions and constantdata (literals) or several executable instructions. For details, refer to Programmer's Guide, 9,"Automatic Literal Pool Generation Function" and 10, "Automatic Repeat Loop Generation
Function".
DSP instructions are instructions that control the DSP of the SH-DSP microprocessor. For details,
refer to Programmer's Guide, 4, "DSP Instructions."
Assembler directives are instructions that give directions to the assembler.
Directive statements are used for file inclusion, conditional assembly, and macro functions. For
details on each of these functions, refer to Programmer's Guide, 6, "File Inclusion Function", 7,"Conditional Assembly Function", or 8, "Macro Function".
(3) Operand
The object(s) of the operation's execution are written as the operand.
The number of operands and their types are determined by the operation. There are also operations
which do not require any operands.
(4) Comment
Notes or explanations that make the program easier to understand are written as the comment.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 12 of 391

1.1.2

Coding of Source Statements

Source statements are written using ASCII characters. Character strings and comments can include
Japanese kana and kanji characters (shift JIS code or EUC code).
In principle, a single statement must be written on a single line. The maximum length of a line is
255 bytes.
(1) Coding of Label
The label is written as follows:• Written starting in the first column,Or:• Written with a colon (:) appended to the end of the label.
Examples:

LABEL1; This label is written starting in the first column.

LABEL2:; This label is terminated with a colon.

----------------------------------------------------------------------; This label is regarded as an error by the assembler,

LABEL3; since it is neither written starting in the first column; nor terminated with a colon.

(2) Coding of Operation
The operation is written as follows:• When there is no label:
Written starting in the second or later column.
• When there is a label:
Written after the label, separated by one or more spaces or tabs.
Examples:

LABEL1:

ADD

R0,R1

; An example with no label.

ADD

R1,R2

; An example with a label.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 13 of 391

CAUTION!
Since white spaces and tabs are ASCII characters, each space or tab requires a byte of storage.
(3) Coding of Operand
The operand is written following the operation field, separated by one or more spaces or tabs.
Examples:

ADD

R0,R1

; The ADD instruction takes two operands.

SHAL

R1

; The SHAL instruction takes one operand.

(4) Coding of Comment
The comment is written following a semicolon (;).
The assembler regards all characters from the semicolon to the end of the line as the comment.
Examples:
ADD

R0,R1

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 14 of 391; Adds R0 to R1.

1.1.3

Coding of Source Statements across Multiple Lines

A single source statement can be written across several lines in the following situations:• When the source statement is too long as a single statement.
• When it is desirable to attach a comment to each operand.
Write source statements across multiple lines using the following procedure.
1. Insert a new line after a comma that separates operands.
2. Insert a plus sign (+) in the first column of the new line.
3. Continue writing the source statement following the plus sign.
Spaces and tabs can be inserted following the plus sign.
Examples:.DATA.L

H'FFFF0000,+

H'FF00FF00,+

H'FFFFFFFF; In this example, a single source statement is written across three lines.

A comment can be attached at the end of each line.
Examples:H'FFFF0000,; Initial value 1.

+

H'FF00FF00,; Initial value 2.

+

H'FFFFFFFF; Initial value 3.

.DATA.L; In this example, a comment is attached to each operand.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 15 of 391

1.2

Reserved Words

Reserved words are names that the assembler reserves as symbols with special meanings.
Register names, operators, and the location counter are used as reserved words. Reserved words
are different depending on the CPU type. Refer to the programming manual of the CPU used, fordetails.
Reserved words must not be used as symbols.
• Register names: R0 to R15, FR0 to FR15, DR0 to DR14 (only even values), XD0 to XD14
(only even values), FV0 to FV12 (only multiples of four), R0_BANK to R7_BANK, SP, SR,
GBR, VBR, MACH, MACL, PR, PC, SSR, SPC, FPUL, FPSCR, MOD, RE, RS, DSR, A0,
A0G, A1, A1G, M0, M1, X0, X1, Y0, Y1, XMTRX, DBR, SGR• Operators: STARTOF, SIZEOF, HIGH, LOW, HWORD, LWORD, $EVEN, $ODD,$EVEN2, $ODD2• Location counter ($)
Note:

R15 and SP indicate the same register.

Reference:
Operators→ Programmer's Guide, 1.6.1, "Expression Elements"
Location counter → Programmer's Guide, 1.5, "Location Counter"
CPU type→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.1, "Target CPU Assembler Directive", .CPU
→ User's Guide, 1.3, "SHCPU Environment Variable"→ User's Guide, 2.2.1, "Target CPU Command Line Option", –CPU
Symbols→ Programmer's Guide, 1.3, "Symbols"

1.3

Symbols

1.3.1

Functions of Symbols

Symbols are names defined by the programmer, and perform the following functions.
• Address symbols:• Constant symbols:

Express data storage and branch destination addresses.
Express constants.

• Aliases of register names: Express general registers and floating-point registers.
Express section names. *• Section names
Note: A section is a part of the program, and the linkage editor regards it as a unit of processing.
The following shows examples of symbol usage.
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 16 of 391

Examples:

∼
BRA

SUB1

∼

; BRA is a branch instruction.
; SUB1 is the address symbol of the destination.

SUB1:

∼
----------------------------------------------------------------------

∼
MAX:

.EQU

100

MOV.B #MAX,R0∼; EQU is an assembler directive that sets a value to a
; symbol.
; MAX expresses the constant value 100.

----------------------------------------------------------------------

∼
MIN:

.REG
MOV.B

∼

; .REG is an assembler directive that defines a register; alias.
#100,MIN ; MIN is an alias for R0.

R0----------------------------------------------------------------------∼.SECTION CD,CODE,ALIGN=4∼; .SECTION is an assembler directive that declares a section.
; CD is the name of the current section.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 17 of 391

1.3.2

Coding of Symbols(1) Available Characters
The following ASCII characters can be used.
• Alphabetical uppercase and lowercase letters (A to Z, a to z)• Numbers (0 to 9)• Underscore (_)• Dollar sign ($)
The assembler distinguishes uppercase letters from lowercase letters in symbols.
(2) First Character in a Symbol
The first character in a symbol must be one of the following.
• Alphabetical uppercase and lowercase letters (A to Z, a to z)• Underscore (_)• Dollar sign ($)
CAUTION!
The dollar sign character used alone is a reserved word that expresses the location counter.
Reference:
Reserved words → Programmer's Guide, 1.2, "Reserved Words"(3) Maximum Length of a Symbol
A symbol may contain up to 251 characters.
The assembler ignores any characters after the first 251.
(4) Names that Cannot Be Used as Symbols
Reserved words cannot be used as symbols. The following names must not be used because they
are used as internal symbols by the assembler.
_$$nnnnn (n is a number from 0 to 9.)Note: Internal symbols are necessary for assembler internal processing. Internal symbols are not
output to assemble listings or object modules.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 18 of 391

1.4

Constants

1.4.1

Integer Constants

Integer constants are expressed with a prefix that indicates the radix.
The radix indicator prefix is a notation that indicates the radix of the constant.
• Binary numbers:• Octal numbers:

The radix indicator “B'” plus a binary constant.
The radix indicator “Q'” plus an octal constant.

The radix indicator “D'” plus a decimal constant.
• Decimal numbers:• Hexadecimal numbers: The radix indicator “H'” plus a hexadecimal constant.
The assembler does not distinguish uppercase letters from lowercase letters in the radix indicator.
The radix indicator and the constant value must be written with no intervening space.
Examples:.DATA.B

B'10001000;.DATA.B

Q'210; These source statements express the same

.DATA.B

D'136; numerical value.

.DATA.B

H'88;

The radix indicator can be omitted. Integer constants with no radix indicator are normally decimal
constants, although the radix for such constants can be changed with the .RADIX assembler
directive.
Reference:
Interpretation of integer constants without a radix specified→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.8, "Other Assembler Directives", .RADIX
Supplement:"Q" is used instead of "O" to avoid confusion with the digit 0.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 19 of 391

1.4.2

Character Constants

Character constants are considered to be constants that represent ASCII codes.
Character constants are written by enclosing up to four ASCII characters in double quotation
marks.
The following ASCII characters can be used in character constants.
ASCII code: H'09 (tab)H'20 (space) to H'7E (tilde)
Examples:.DATA.L"ABC"; This is the same as .DATA.L H'00414243.

.DATA.W"AB"; This is the same as .DATA.W H'4142.

.DATA.B"A"; This is the same as .DATA.B H'41.
; The ASCII code for A is: H'41
; The ASCII code for B is: H'42
; The ASCII code for C is: H'43

In addition, Japanese kana and kanji characters in shift JIS code or EUC code can be used. Whenusing Japanese characters in shift JIS code or EUC code, be sure to specify the SJIS or EUC
command line option, respectively. Note that the shift JIS code and EUC code cannot be used
together in one source program.
Use two double quotation marks in succession to indicate a single double quotation mark in acharacter constant.
Example:.DATA.B; This is a character constant consisting of a single""""

double quotation mark.
.DATA.L""; Japanese kanji characters.

References:
SJIS command line option→ User's Guide, 2.2.7, "Japanese Character Command Line Options," –SJIS
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 20 of 391

EUC command line option→ User's Guide, 2.2.7, "Japanese Character Command Line Options," –EUC
1.4.3

Floating-Point Constants

Floating-point constants can be specified as operands in assembler directives for reserving
floating-point constants.
Floating-Point Constant Representation:
Floating-point constants can be represented in decimal and hexadecimal.
• Decimal representation

F'[{±}] n[.[m]]
. m
F' :

[t[[{±}]xx]]

Indicates that the number is decimal. It cannot be omitted.

[{±}] n[.[m]]. m: "n" indicates the integer part in decimal. "m" indicates the fraction partin decimal. Either the integer part or the fraction part can be omitted. If the sign (±)
is omitted, the assembler assumes it is positive.

t :Indicates that the number is in either of the following precisions• S: Single precision• D: Double precision
If omitted, the assembler assumes the operation size of the assembler directive.

[{±}]xx : Indicates the exponent part in decimal. If omitted, the assembler assumes 0. If thesign (±) is omitted, the assembler assumes it is positive.
Example:F'0.5S–2 = 0.5×10–2
F'.123D3 =0.123×103=

0.005 = H'3BA3D70A= 123= H'405EC00000000000

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 21 of 391

• Hexadecimal representation
H'xxxx[.t]H' :Indicates that the number is hexadecimal. It cannot be omitted.

xxxx :

Indicates the bit pattern of the floating-point constant in hexadecimal. If the bit
pattern is shorter than the specified data length, it is aligned to the right end of thereserved area and 0s are added to the remaining bits in the reserved area. If the bit
pattern is longer than the specified data length, the right-side bits of the bit pattern areallocated for the specified data length and the remaining bits of the bit pattern are
ignored.

t:

Indicates that the number is in either of the following precisions• S: Single precision• D: Double precision
If omitted, the assembler assumes the operation size of the assembler directive.

This format directly specifies the bit pattern of the floating-point constant to represent data thatis difficult to represent in decimal format, such as 0s for the specified data length or infinity.
Example:H'0123456789ABCDEF.S= H'89ABCDEF

H'FFFF.D= H'000000000000FFFF

Floating-Point Data Range:
Table 1-1 lists the floating-point data types.
Table 1-1

Floating-Point Data Types

Data Type

Description

Normalized number

The absolute value is between the underflow and overflow boundaries
including the boundary values.

Denormalized number

The absolute value is between 0 and the underflow boundary.

Zero

The absolute value is 0.

Infinity

The absolute value is larger than the overflow boundary.

Not-a-Number (NAN)

A value that is not a numerical value. Includes sNAN (signaling NAN)
and qNAN (quiet NAN).

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 22 of 391

These data types are shown on the following number line. NAN cannot be shown on the number
line because it is not handled as a numerical value.
0−∞+∞
Negative normalized numberxx Zero xx

Negative denormalized number

Positive normalized number
Positive denormalized number

Table 1-2 lists the numerical value ranges the assembler can use.
Table 1-2

Data Types and Numerical Value Ranges (Absolute Value)

Data Type

Single Precision

Double Precision

Normalized number

Maximum value

3.40 × 1038

1.79 × 10308

Minimum value

1.18 × 10–38

2.23 × 10–308

Maximum value

1.17 × 10–38

2.22 × 10–308

Minimum value

1.40 × 10–45

4.94 × 10–324

Denormalized number

Floating-Point Data Format:
The floating-point data format is shown below:
Single Precision:
31,30,.......,23,22,.........................................................,0S

E

F

Double Precision:
63,62,................,52,51,......................................................................,0S

E

F: Decimal point
S : Sign bit
E : Exponent part
F : Fraction partRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 23 of 391

• Sign bit (S)Indicates the sign of a value. Positive and negative are represented by 0 and 1, respectively.
• Exponent part (E)Indicates the exponent of a value. The actual exponent value is obtained by subtracting the bias
value from the value specified in this exponent part.
• Fraction part (F)Each bit has its own significance and corresponds to 2–1, 2–2, ..., 2–n from the start bit,respectively ("n" is the bit length of the fraction part).
Table 1-3 shows the size of each parameter in data format.
Table 1-3

Data Format SizeParameter

Single Precision

Double Precision

Bit length

32 bits

64 bits

Sign bit (S)

1 bit

1 bit

Exponent part (E)8 bits

11 bits

Fraction part (F)23 bits

52 bits

Bias of exponent value

127

1023

A floating-point number is represented using the symbols in table 1-3 as follows:
2E−bias . ( 1)s .

(1. F)(0. F): Normalized number: Denormalized number(1. F) = 1 + b0 × 2–1 + b1 × 2–2 + ..... + bn–1 × 2–n(0. F) = b0 × 2–1 + b1 × 2–2 + ..... + bn–1 × 2–nb: Bit location in the fraction partn: Bit length of the fraction partRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 24 of 391

Table 1-4 shows the floating-point representation for each data type. NAN cannot be represented
because it is not handled as a numerical value.
Table 1-4

Floating-Point Representation for Each Data Type

Data Type

Single Precision

Double Precision

Normalized number(–1)s · 2E–127 · (1. F)(–1)s · 2E–1023 · (1. F)

Denormalized number(–1)s · 2–126 · (0. F)(–1)s · 2–1022 · (0. F)

Zero(–1)s · 0(–1)s · 0

Infinity(–1)s · ∞(–1)s · ∞Not-a-Number (NAN)

quiet NAN, signaling NAN

quiet NAN, signaling NAN

Valid Range for Floating-Point Constants:
When converting floating-point constants used in assembler directives for reserving floating-point
numbers into object codes, the assembler rounds them in the following two modes to set the valid
range.
• Round to Nearest even (RN)
Rounds the least significant bit in the object code to its nearest absolute value. When two
absolute values are at the same distance, rounds the least significant bit to become zero.
• Round to Zero (RZ)
Rounds the least significant bit in the object code to zero.
Example:Object code of .FDATA.S F' 1S-1
RN: H'3DCCCCCD
RZ: H'3DCCCCCC

Reference:Rounding mode setting→ User's Guide, 2.2.10, "Floating-Point Data Command Line Options," –ROUND

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 25 of 391

Handling Denormalized Numbers:
The assembler handles denormalized numbers differently depending on the CPU type. In a CPU
that does not handle denormalized numbers, if a value in the denormalized number range is used,
warning number 841 occurs and the object code is output as zero.
In a CPU that handles denormalized numbers, if a value in the denormalized number range is used,
warning number 842 occurs and the object code is output in denormalized numbers.
How to handle denormalized numbers can be switched with the DENORMALIZE command line
option.
Examples:CPU not handling denormalized numbers:.FDATA.S F' 1S-40

Warning 841, Object code H'00000000

CPU handling denormalized numbers:.FDATA.S F' 1S-40

Warning 842, Object code H'000116C2

Reference:
Denormalized numbers→ User's Guide, 2.2.10, "Floating-Point Data Command Line Options," –DENORMALIZE
1.4.4

Fixed-Point Constants

Fixed-point constants can be specified as operands in the assembler directive for reserving fixedpoint data.
Fixed-Point Number Representation:
Fixed-point numbers express real numbers ranging from –1.0 to 1.0 in decimal.
Word size and longword size are available for fixed-point numbers.
• Word-size fixed-point numbers
Two-byte signed integers expressing real numbers ranging from –1.0 to 1.0.
The real number expressed by 2-byte signed integer x (–32,768 < = x < = 32,767) is x/32768.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 26 of 391

Example:
Fixed-point number

Word-size representation–1.0

H'8000–0.5

H'C0000.0

H'00000.5

H'4000

1.0

H'7FFF• Longword-size fixed-point numbers
Four-byte signed integers expressing real numbers ranging from –1.0 to 1.0. The real number
expressed by 4-byte signed integer x (–2,147,483,648 < = x < = 2,147,483,647) is
x/2147483648.
Example:Fixed-point number

Longword-size representation–1.0

H'80000000–0.5

H'C0000000

0.0

H'00000000

0.5

H'40000000

1.0

H'7FFFFFFF

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 27 of 391

Fixed-Point Data Format:
The fixed-point data format consists of a sign bit and a 15-bit fraction part in word size, and a sign
bit and a 31-bit fraction part in longword size. The decimal point is assumed to be fixed on theright of the sign bit.
• Word size
1514

S

0
: Decimal point
S : Sign bit
F : Fraction partF

• Longword size
3130

S

0

F

• Sign bit (S)Indicates the sign of a value. Positive and negative are represented by 0 and 1, respectively.
• Fraction part (F)Each bit has its own significance and corresponds to 2–1, 2–2, ..., 2–31 from the start bit,respectively.
Valid Range for Fixed-Point Numbers:
In long-word size, 31 bits can represent nine digits of data in decimal, but the assembler handles
ten digits in decimal as a valid number, rounds the 35th bit in RN (round to the nearest absolutevalue) mode, and uses the high-order 31 bits of the result as fixed-point data.
Note: The actual fixed-point data range is –1.0 to 0.9999999999, but the assembler assumes 1.0
as 0.9999999999 and represents it as H'7FFFFFFF.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 28 of 391

1.5

Location Counter

The location counter expresses the address (location) in memory where the corresponding object
code (the result of converting executable instructions and data into code the microprocessor can
regard) is stored.
The value of the location counter is automatically adjusted according to the object code output.
The value of the location counter can be changed intentionally using assembler directives.
Examples:∼.ORG

H'00001000; This assembler directive sets the location counter to; H'00001000.

.DATA.W

H'FF; The object code generated by this assembler directive has; a length of 2 bytes.
; The location counter changes to H'00001002.

.DATA.W

H'F0; The object code generated by this assembler directive has; a length of 2 bytes.
; The location counter changes to H'00001004.

.DATA.W

H'10; The object code generated by this assembler directive has; a length of 2 bytes.
; The location counter changes to H'00001006.

.ALIGN

4; The value of the location counter is corrected to be a multiple; of 4.
; The location counter changes to H'00001008.

.DATA.L

H'FFFFFFFF; The object code generated by this assembler directive has; a length of 4 bytes.
; The location counter changes to H'0000100C.

;
;
;
;
;

∼

.ORG is an assembler directive that sets the value of the location counter.
.ALIGN is an assembler directive that adjusts the value of the location counter.
.DATA is an assembler directive that reserves data in memory.
.W is a specifier that indicates that data is handled in word (2 bytes) size.
.L is a specifier that indicates that data is handled in longword (4 bytes) size.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 29 of 391

References:
Setting the value of the location counter→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.2, "Section and Location Counter Assembler Directives", .ORG
Correcting the value of the location counter→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.2, "Section and Location Counter Assembler Directives",.ALIGNThe location counter is referenced using the dollar sign symbol.
Examples:

LABEL1:.EQU$; This assembler directive sets the value of the; location counter to the symbol LABEL1.

;.EQU is an assembler directive that sets the value to a symbol.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 30 of 391

1.6

Expressions

Expressions are combinations of constants, symbols, and operators that derive a value, and areused as the operands of executable instructions and assembler directives.
1.6.1

Elements of Expression

An expression consists of terms, operators, and parentheses.
(1) Terms
The terms are the followings:• A constant• The location counter reference ($)• A symbol (excluding aliases of the register name)• The result of a calculation specified by a combination of the above terms and an operator.
An independent term is also a type of expression.
(2) Operators
Table 1-5 shows the operators supported by the assembler.
Table 1-5

Operators

Operator TypeOperator

Operation

CodingArithmetic operations+

Unary plus

+ <term>–

Unary minus– <term>+

Addition<term1> + <term2>–

Subtraction<term1> – <term2>*

Multiplication<term1> * <term2>/

Division<term1> / <term2>~ ^Unary negation~ <term>&

Logical AND<term1> & <term2>|

Logical OR<term1> | <term2>~ ^Exclusive OR<term1> ~ <term2><<

Arithmetic left shift<term 1> << <term 2>>>

Arithmetic right shift<term 1> >> <term 2>

Logic operations

Shift operations

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 31 of 391

Table 1-5

Operators (cont)Operator TypeOperator

Operation

CodingSection set
operations*

STARTOF

Derives the starting addressof a section set.

STARTOF <section name>SIZEOF

Derives the size of a section
set in bytes.

SIZEOF <section name>$EVEN

1 when the value is amultiple of 2, and 0
otherwise$EVEN <symbol>$ODD

0 when the value is amultiple of 2, and 1
otherwise$ODD <symbol>$EVEN2

1 when the value is amultiple of 4, and 0
otherwise$EVEN2 <symbol>$ODD2

0 when the value is amultiple of 4, and 1
otherwise$ODD2 <symbol>

Even/odd operations

Extraction operations

HIGH

Extracts the high-order byte

HIGH <term>

LOW

Extracts the low-order byte

LOW <term>

HWORD

Extracts the high-order word

HWORD <term>

LWORD

Extracts the low-order word

LWORD <term>

Note: See the supplement below.

Supplement:
In this assembly language, programs are divided into units called section. Sections are the units inwhich linkage processing is performed.
When there are multiple sections of the same type and same name within a given program, thelinkage editor links them into a single "section set".
Reference:
Sections → Programmer's Guide, 2.1, "Sections"(3) Parentheses
Parentheses modify the operation precedence.
See the next section, section 1.6.2, "Operation Precedence", for a description of the use ofparentheses.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 32 of 391

1.6.2

Operation Precedence

When multiple operations appear in a single expression, the order in which the processing is
performed is determined by the operator precedence and by the use of parentheses. The assembler
processes operations according to the following rules.
<Rule 1>
Processing starts from operations enclosed in parentheses.
When there are multiple parentheses, processing starts with the operations surrounded by the
innermost parentheses.
<Rule 2>
Processing starts with the operator with the highest precedence.
<Rule 3>
Processing proceeds in the direction of the operator association rule when operators have the same
precedence.
Table 1-6 shows the operator precedence and the association rule.
Table 1-6

Operator Precedence and Association Rules

Precedence

Operator

Association Rule

1 (high)+ – ~ ^ STARTOF SIZEOF$EVEN $ODD $EVEN2 $ODD2
HIGH LOW HWORD LWORD*

Operators are processed from right to left.

2* /Operators are processed from left to right.

3+ –Operators are processed from left to right.

4

<< >>

Operators are processed from left to right.

5&

Operators are processed from left to right.

6 (low)| ~ ^Operators are processed from left to right.

Note: The operators of precedence 1 (highest precedence) are for unary operation.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 33 of 391

The figures below show examples of expressions.
Example 1:
1 + ( 2 - ( 3 + ( 4 - 5 ) ) )
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

The assembler calculates this expression in the order (a) to (d).
The result of (a) is –1
The result of (b) is 2
The result of (c) is 0
The result of (d) is 1

The final result of this calculation is 1.

Example 2:- H'FFFFFFF1 + H'000000F0 * H'00000010 | H'000000F0 & H'0000FFFF
(a)

(b)

(d)

(c)
(e)

The assembler calculates this expression in the order (a) to (e).
The result of (a) is H'0000000F
The result of (b) is H'00000F00
The result of (c) is H'00000F0F
The result of (d) is H'000000F0
The result of (e) is H'00000FFF

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 34 of 391

The final result of this calculation is H'00000FFF.

Example 3:- ~ - ~ H'0000000F
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

The assembler calculates this expression in the order (a) to (d).
The result of (a) is H'FFFFFFF0
The result of (b) is H'00000010
The result of (c) is H'FFFFFFEF
The result of (d) is H'00000011

The final result of this calculation is H'00000011.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 35 of 391

1.6.3

Detailed Description on Operation

STARTOF Operation: Determines the start address of a section set after the specified sections
are linked by the linkage editor.
SIZEOF Operation: Determines the size of a section set after the specified section are linked by
the linkage editor.
Example:.CPU
SH1.SECTION INIT_RAM,DATA,ALIGN=4.RES.B
H'100.SECTION INIT_DATA,DATA,ALIGN=4
INIT_BGN .DATA.L(STARTOF INIT_RAM).......................; (1)INIT_END .DATA.L(STARTOF INIT_RAM) + (SIZEOF INIT_RAM)...; (2);;.SECTION MAIN,CODE,ALIGN=4
INITIAL:
MOV.L
DATA1,R6
MOV
#0,R5
MOV.L
DATA1+4,R3
BRA
LOOP2
MOV.L
@R3,R4
LOOP1:
Initializes the data area in section
MOV.L
R5,@R4
INIT_RAM to 0.
ADD
#4,R4
LOOP2:
MOV.L@R6,R3
CMP/HI
R3,R4
BF
LOOP1
RTS
NOP
DATA1:.DATA.L
INIT_END.DATA.L
INIT_BGN.END(1) Determines the start address of section INIT_RAM.
(2) Determines the end address of section INIT_RAM.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 36 of 391

HIGH Operation: Extracts the high-order byte from the low-order two bytes of a 4-byte value.
Before operation
31

24 23

After operation
16 15

8 7

0

31

H'xx

H'00

24 23
16 15
8 7
0
H'00
H'00
H'xx

Example:

LABEL

.EQU

H'00007FFF.DATA

HIGH LABEL; Reserves integer data H'0000007F on memory.

LOW Operation: Extracts the lowest-order one byte from a 4-byte value.
Before operation
31

24 23

After operation
16 15

8 7

0

31

H'xx

H'00

24 23
16 15
8 7
0
H'00
H'00
H'xx

HWORD Operation: Extracts the high-order two bytes from a 4-byte value.
Before operation
31

After operation
16 15

0

31

H'xxxx

16 15
H'00000H'xxxx

LWORD Operation: Extracts the low-order two bytes from a 4-byte value.
Before operation
31

After operation
16 15

0
H'xxxx31

16 15
H'00000H'xxxxRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 37 of 391

Even/Odd Operation: Determines if the value of the address symbol is a multiple of 2 or 4.
Table 1-7 shows the even/odd operations.
Table 1-7

Even/Odd Operations

Operator

Operation$EVEN

1 when the value is a multiple of 2, and 0 otherwise$ODD

0 when the value is a multiple of 2, and 1 otherwise$EVEN2

1 when the value is a multiple of 4, and 0 otherwise$ODD2

0 when the value is a multiple of 4, and 1 otherwise

Example:To obtain the current program counter value using an $ODD2 operator.

LAB:
MOVA

@(0,PC),R0

ADD#-4+2*$ODD2 LAB,R0; $ODD2 gives 0 when LAB is; a multiple of 4, and gives 1 when
; LAB is not a multiple of 4.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 38 of 391

1.6.4

Notes on Expressions(1) Internal Processing
The assembler regards expression values as 32-bit signed values.
Example:~H'F0
The assembler regards H'F0 as H'000000F0.
Therefore, the value of ~H'F0 is H'FFFFFF0F. (Note that this is not H'0000000F.)(2) Arithmetic Operators
Where values must be determined at assembly, the multiplication and division operators cannot
take terms that contain relative values (values which are not determined until the end of thelinkage process) as their operands.
Example:.IMPORT

SYM

.DATA

SYM/10; Correctly assembled.

.ORG

SYM/10; An error will occur.

Also, a divisor of 0 cannot be used with the division operator.
(3) Logic Operators
The logic operators cannot take terms that contain relative values as their operands.
Reference:
Relative values → Programmer's Guide, 2.2, "Absolute and Relative Values".

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 39 of 391

1.7

Character Strings

Character strings are sequences of character data.
The following ASCII characters can be used in character strings.
ASCII code: H'09 (tab)H'20 (space) to H'7E (tilde)
A single character in a character string has as its value the ASCII code for that character and isrepresented as a byte sized data object. In addition, Japanese kana and kanji characters in shift JIS
code or EUC code can be used. When using Japanese characters in shift JIS code or EUC code, besure to specify the SJIS or EUC command line option, respectively. If not specified, Japanesecharacters are handled as the Japanese code specified by the host machine.
Character strings must be written enclosed in double quotation marks.
Use two double quotation marks in succession to indicate a single double quotation mark in acharacter string.
Examples:.SDATA; This statement reserves the character string data

"Hello!"; Hello!
.SDATA""; This statement reserves the character string data;

.SDATA"""Hello!"""; This statement reserves the character string data
; "Hello!";.SDATA is an assembler directive that reserves character string data in memory.

Supplement:
The difference between character constants and character strings is as follows.
Character constants are numeric values. They have a data size of either 1 byte, 2 bytes, or 4 bytes.
Character strings cannot be handled as numeric values. A character string has a data size between
1 byte and 255 bytes.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 40 of 391

References:
SJIS command line option→ User's Guide, 2.2.7, "Japanese Character Command Line Options," –SJIS
EUC command line option→ User's Guide, 2.2.7, "Japanese Character Command Line Options," –EUC

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 41 of 391

1.8

Local Label

1.8.1

Local Label Functions

A local label is valid locally between address symbols. Since a local label does not conflict withthe other labels outside its scope, the user does not have to consider other label names. A local
label can be defined by writing in the label field in the same way as a normal address symbol, andcan be referenced by an operand.
An example of local label descriptions is shown below.
Example:LABEL1:?0001:; Local block 1 start∼

CMP/EQ
BT
BRA?0002:LABEL2:?0001:

R1,R2
?0002
?0001

∼
∼

CMP/GEBT
BRA; Branches to ?0002 of local block 1; Branches to ?0001 of local block 1; Local block 2 start

R1,R2
?0002
?0001

?0002:LABEL3:; Branches to ?0002 of local block 2; Branches to ?0001 of local block 2; Local block 3 start

Note:
A local label cannot be referenced during debugging.
A local label cannot be specified as any of the following items:• Macro name• Section name• Object module name• Label in .ASSIGNA, .ASSIGNC, .EQU, .ASSIGN, .REG, or .DEFINE• Operand in .EXPORT, .IMPORT, or .GLOBAL
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 42 of 391

1.8.2

Description Method of Local LabelFirst Character:
A local label is a character string starting with a question mark (?).
Usable Characters:
The following ASCII characters can be used in a local label, except for the first character:• Alphabetical uppercase and lowercase letters (A to Z and a to z)• Numbers (0 to 9)• Underscore (_)• Dollar sign ($)
The assembler distinguishes uppercase letters from lowercase ones in local labels.
Maximum Length:
The length of local label characters is 2 to 16 characters. If 17 or more characters are specified, theassembler will not recognize them as a local label.
1.8.3

Scope of Local Labels

The scope of a local label is called a local block. Local blocks are separated by address symbols,or by the .SECTION directives.
The local label defined within a local block can be referenced in that local block.
A local label belonging to a local block is interpreted as being unique even if its spelling is thesame as local labels in other local blocks; it does not cause an error.
Note:
The address symbols defined by the .EQU or .ASSIGN directive are not interpreted as delimiters
for the local block.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 43 of 391

Section 2 Basic Programming Knowledge
2.1

Sections

If source programs are compared to natural language writing, a section will correspond to a"chapter." The section is the processing unit used when the linkage editor links object modules.
2.1.1

Section Types by Usage

Sections are classified by usage into the following types.
• Code section• Data section• Common section• Stack section• Dummy section(1) Code Section
The following can be written in a code section:• Executable instructions• Extended instructions• Assembler directives that reserve initialized data.
Examples:.SECTION

CD,CODE,ALIGN=4; This assembler directive declares a; code section with the name CD.

X:

MOV.L

X,R1

MOV

∼

R1,R2

.ALIGN

4.DATA.L

H'FFFFFFFF∼; This is an executable instruction.

; This assembler directive reserves; initialized data.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 45 of 391

(2) Data Section
The following can be written in a data section:• Assembler directives that reserve initialized data.
• Assembler directives that reserve uninitialized data.
Examples:.SECTION

DT1,DATA,ALIGN=4; This assembler directive declares; a data section with the name DT1.

.DATA.W

H'FF00; These assembler directives reserve.DATA.B

H'FF; initialized data.

~.SECTION

DT2,DATA,ALIGN=4; This assembler directive declares; a data section with the name DT2.

.RES.W

10; These assembler directives reserve.RES.B10; data areas that do not have initial; values.

~

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 46 of 391

(3) Common Section
A common section is used as a section to hold data that is shared between files when a source
program consists of multiple source files.
The following can be written in a common section:• Assembler directives that reserve initialized data.
• Assembler directives that reserve uninitialized data.
Supplement:
The linkage editor reserves common sections with the same name to the same area in memory. In
the example shown in figure 2-1, the common section CM declared in file A and the common
section CM declared in file B are reserved to the same area in memory.
MemoryProgramFile A

File B

Common section CM

Common section CM

Common section CM

Figure 2-1 Memory Reservation of Common Section

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 47 of 391

(4) Stack Section
The section that the microprocessor uses as a stack area (an area for temporary data storage) iscalled the stack section.
The following can be written in the stack section:• Assembler directives that reserve uninitialized data.
Examples:.SECTION ST,STACK,ALIGN=4; This assembler directive declares a; stack section with the name ST.

.RES.B1024; This assembler directive reserves a; stack area of 1024 bytes.

STK:(5) Dummy Section
A dummy section is a hypothetical section for representing data structures. The assembler does not
output dummy sections to the object module.
The following can be written in a dummy section:• Assembler directives that reserve uninitialized data.
Examples:.SECTION DM,DUMMY; This assembler directive declares; a dummy section with the name DM.

.RES.B1; The assembler does not output theA:.RES.B1; section DM to the object module.

B:.RES.B

2∼
Specific methods for specifying data structures are described in the supplement on the next page.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 48 of 391

Supplement:
As shown in figure 2-2, it is possible to access areas in memory by using address symbols from adummy section.

Data structure

MemoryReferencepoint

The start ofarea 1

Address
symbol A

Item A

Address
symbol B

Item B

Dummy
sectionThe start of area 1
plus AThe start of area 1
plus B

Item A
Area 1
Item BThe start ofarea 2The start of area 2plus AThe start of area 2plus B

Item A
Area 2Item B

Figure 2-2 Data Structure Example Using Dummy Section
Example:In the example above, assume that R1 holds the starting address of area 1 and R2 holds thestarting address of area 2.

MOV.L@(B,R1),R0; Moves the contents of item B in area 1 to R0.

MOV.L

R0,@(B,R2); Moves the contents of R0 to item B in area 2.

∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 49 of 391

CAUTION!
1. The following cannot be used in stack and dummy sections:a. Executable instructions
b. Extended instructions
c. Assembler directives that reserve initialized data(.DATA, .DATAB, .SDATA, .SDATAB, .SDATAC, .SDATAZ, .FDATA, .FDATAB, and.XDATA)
2. When using a data or common section, be sure to keep in mind whether that section is reserved
to ROM or RAM.
2.1.2

Absolute Address Sections and Relative Address Sections

A section can be classified as either an absolute address section or as a relative address section
depending on whether absolute start addresses are given to the sections at assembly.
(1) Absolute Address Section
The memory locations of absolute address sections are specified in the source program, and cannot
be changed by the linkage editor. In this assembly language, locations in an absolute address
section are expressed as absolute addresses, which are addresses that express the actual position inmemory.
Examples:.SECTION ABS,DATA,LOCATE=H'0000F000; ABS is an absolute address section.
; The starting address of section ABS is; the absolute address H'0000F000.

.DATA.W

H'1111; The constant H'1111 is reserved at; the absolute address H'0000F000.

.DATA.W

H'2222; The constant H'2222 is reserved at; the absolute address H'0000F002.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 50 of 391

(2) Relative Address Section
The locations in memory of relative section are not specified in the source program, but rather are
determined when the sections are linked by the linkage editor. In this assembly language, locations
in a relative address section are expressed as relative addresses, which are addresses that express
the position relative to the start of the section itself.
Examples:.SECTION

REL,DATA,ALIGN=4; REL is a relative address section.
; The starting address of section REL is; determined after linkage.

.DATA.W

H'1111; The constant H'1111 is reserved at the; relative address H'00000000.

.DATA.W

H'2222; The constant H'2222 is reserved at the; relative address H'00000002.

Supplement:
Dummy sections correspond neither to relative nor to absolute address sections.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 51 of 391

2.2

Absolute and Relative Values

Absolute values are determined when assembly completes. Relative values are not determineduntil the linkage editor completes.
2.2.1

Absolute Values

The following are the absolute values handled by the assembler.
(1) Constants• Integer constants• Character constants• Symbols that have a value that is one of the above (hereafter referred to as constant symbols).
(2) Absolute Address Values• The location counter referenced in an absolute address section• The location counter referenced in a dummy section• Symbols that have a value that is one of the above (hereafter referred to as absolute address
symbols).
(3) Other Absolute Values
Expressions whose value is determined when assembly completes.
2.2.2

Relative Values

The following are the relative values handled by the assembler.
(1) Relative Address Values• The location counter referenced in a relative address section• Symbols that have the above as a value (hereafter referred to as relative address symbols).
(2) External Reference Values
Symbols that reference another file (hereafter referred to as import symbols).
(3) Other Relative Values
Expressions whose value is not determined until the linkage editor completes.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 52 of 391

2.3

Symbol Definition and Reference

2.3.1

Symbol Definition(1) Normal Definition
The normal method for defining a symbol is to write that symbol in the label field of a source
statement. The value of that symbol will then be the value of the location counter at that point in
the program.
Examples:.SECTION DT1,DATA,LOCATE=H'0000F000; This statement declares an; absolute address section.

X1:.DATA.W

H'1111; The value of X1 becomes H'0000F000.

X2:.DATA.W

H'2222; The value of X2 becomes H'0000F002.

~.SECTION DT2,DATA,ALIGN=4; This statement declares a relative; address section.

Y1:.DATA.W

H'1111; The value of Y1 is determined when
; linkage completes, and its value is; the start address of the section.

Y2:.DATA.W

H'2222; The value of Y2 is determined when
; linkage completes, and its value is; the start address of the section; plus 2.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 53 of 391

(2) Definition by Assembler Directive
Symbols can be defined by using assembler directives to set an arbitrary value or a special
meaning.
Examples:.SECTION DT1,DATA,ALIGN=4; DT1 is the section name.
; A section name is also a type of symbol; that expresses the start address of; a section.
; However, the syntactic handling of address; symbols and section names is different.

X:

.EQU

100

; The value of X is 100.
; X cannot be redefined.

Y:.ASSIGN

10; The value of Y is 10.
; Y can be redefined.

Z:

.REG

R1

; Z becomes an alias of the general; register R1.
; Z cannot be redefined.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 54 of 391

2.3.2

Symbol Reference

There are three forms of symbol reference as follows:• Forward reference• Backward reference• External reference
Supplement:
Figure 2-3 shows the meaning of the terms forward and backward as used in this manual.
File
Backward

Source program start

Reference position

ForwardSource program end

Figure 2-3 Meaning of the Terms Forward and Backward
Figure 2-4 shows the meaning of the term external as used in this manual.
File
File
Reference position
External

Figure 2-4 Meaning of the Term External

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 55 of 391

(1) Forward Reference
Forward reference means referencing a symbol that is defined forward from the point of reference.
Examples:∼
BRA

FORWARD:FORWARD∼∼; BRA is a branch instruction.
; This is a forward reference to the symbol FORWARD.

(2) Backward Reference
Backward reference means referring to a symbol that is defined backward from the point ofreference.
Examples:

BACK:

∼
∼
BRA

BACK

∼

; BRA is a branch instruction.
; This is a backward reference to the symbol BACK.

(3) External Reference
When a source program consists of multiple source files, a reference to a symbol defined inanother file is called an external reference. External reference is described in the next
section, 2.4, "Separate Assembly".

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 56 of 391

2.4

Separate Assembly

2.4.1

Separate Assembly

Separate assembly refers to the technique of creating a source program in multiple separate source
files, and finally creating a single load module by linking together those source files' object
modules using the linkage editor.
The process of developing software often consists of repeatedly correcting and reassembling the
program. In such cases, if the source program is partitioned, it will be only necessary toreassemble the source file that was changed. As a result, the time required to construct thecomplete program will be significantly reduced.
If a source program is collected
together in a single file...

If a source program is partitioned
into several files...

File

File

Processing 1

Processing 1
File
Processing 2

Processing 2
Processing 3

File
Processing 3
File
Processing 4

Processing 4
File
Processing 5

Processing 5
File

Processing 6

Processing 6: Part of the source program that
requires changes.
: Range of the program that must
be reassembled.

Figure 2-5 Relationship between the Changed Range of the Source Program and the Rangeof the Program that must be Reassembled

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 57 of 391

The procedure involved in separate assembly consists of steps 1 to 4.
1. Investigate methods for partitioning the program.
Normally, programs are partitioned by function.
Note that the memory reservation of the section must also be considered at this point.
2. Divide the source program into separate files and edit those files accordingly.
3. Assemble the individual files.
4. Link the individual object modules into a single load module.
2.4.2

Declaration of Export Symbols and Import Symbols

When a source program consists of multiple files, referencing a symbol defined in one file fromanother file is called "external reference" or "import." When referencing a symbol externally, it isnecessary to declare to the assembler that "this symbol is shared between multiple files" (thisdeclaration is called "external definition" or "export").
(1) Export Symbol Declaration
This declaration is used to declare that the definition of the symbol is valid in other files.
.EXPORT or .GLOBAL directive is used to make this declaration.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 58 of 391

(2) Import Symbol Declaration
This declaration is used to declare that a symbol defined in another file is referenced. .IMPORT or.GLOBAL directive is used to make this declaration.
Examples:In this example the symbol MAX is defined in file A and referenced in file B.
File A:MAX:

File B:∼.EXPORTMAX; Declares MAX to be an export symbol.

∼

100; Defines MAX.

MAX

; Declares MAX to be an import symbol.

#MAX,R0; References MAX.

.EQU∼
.IMPORT∼

MOV

Reference:
Symbol Export and Import→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.5, "Export and Import Assembler Directives", .EXPORT,.IMPORT, .GLOBAL

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 59 of 391

Section 3 Executable Instructions
3.1

Overview of Executable Instructions

The executable instructions are the instructions of microprocessor. The microprocessor interpretsand executes the executable instructions in the object code stored in memory.
An executable instruction source statement has the following basic form.
[<symbol>:]<mnemonic>[.<operation size>] [ <addressing mode>[,<addressing mode]] [;<comment>]

Label

Operation

Comment

OperandThis section describes the mnemonic, operation size, and addressing mode. The other elements aredescribed in detail in section 1, "Program Elements", in the Programmer's Guide.
(1) Mnemonic
The mnemonic expresses the executable instruction. Abbreviations that indicate the type ofprocessing are provided as mnemonics for microprocessor instructions.
The assembler does not distinguish uppercase and lowercase letters in mnemonics.
(2) Operation Size
The operation size is the unit for processing data. The operation sizes vary with the executable
instruction. The assembler does not distinguish uppercase and lowercase letters in the operation
size.
Specifier

Data Size

B

Byte

W

Word (2 bytes)

L

Longword (4 bytes)

S

Single precision (4 bytes)

D

Double precision (8 bytes)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 61 of 391

(3) Addressing Mode
The addressing mode specifies the data area accessed, and the destination address. The addressing
modes vary with the executable instruction. Table 3-1 shows the addressing modes.
Table 3-1

Addressing Modes

Addressing Mode

Name

Description

Rn

Register direct

The contents of the specified register.

@Rn

Register indirect

A memory location. The value in Rn gives the start
address of the memory accessed.

@Rn+

Register indirect with
post-increment

A memory location. The value in Rn (before being
incremented*1) gives the start address of thememory accessed.
The microprocessor first uses the value in Rn forthe memory reference, and increments Rn
afterwards.

@–Rn

Register indirect withpre-decrement

A memory location. The value in Rn (after being
decremented*2) gives the start address of thememory accessed.
The microprocessor first decrements Rn, and thenuses that value for the memory reference.

@(disp,Rn)

Register indirect withdisplacement*3

A memory location. The start address of thememory access is given by: the value of Rn plus
the displacement (disp).
The value of Rn is not changed.

@(R0,Rn)

Register indirect withindex

A memory location. The start address of thememory access is given by: the value of R0 plus
the value of Rn.
The values of R0 and Rn are not changed.

@(disp,GBR)

GBR indirect withdisplacement

A memory location. The start address of thememory access is given by: the value of GBR plus
the displacement (disp).
The value of GBR is not changed.

@(R0,GBR)

GBR indirect with index A memory location. The start address of thememory access is given by: the value of GBR plus
the value of R0.
The values of GBR and R0 are not changed.

@(disp,PC)

PC relative withdisplacement

Notes 1 to 3: See next page.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 62 of 391

A memory location. The start address of thememory access is given by: the value of the PC
plus the displacement (disp).

Table 3-1

Addressing Modes (cont)

Addressing Mode

Name

Description

symbolPC relative specified
with symbol[When used as the operand of a branch instruction]
The symbol directly indicates the destination
address.
The assembler derives a displacement (disp) fromthe symbol and the value of the PC, using theformula: disp = symbol – PC.
[When used as the operand of a data move
instruction]
A memory location. The symbol indicates the start
address of the memory accessed.
The assembler derives a displacement (disp) fromthe symbol and the value of the PC, using theformula: disp = symbol – PC.
[When used as the operand of an instruction thatspecifies the RS or RE register (LDRS or LDRE
instruction)]
A memory location. The symbol indicates the start
address*4 of the memory accessed.
The assembler derives a displacement (disp) fromthe symbol and the value of the PC, using theformula: disp = symbol – PC.

#imm

Immediate

Indicates a constant.

Notes: 1. Increment
The amount of the increment is 1 when the operation size is a byte, 2 when theoperation size is a word (two bytes), and 4 when the operation size is a longword (fourbytes).
2. Decrement
The amount of the decrement is 1 when the operation size is a byte, 2 when theoperation size is a word, and 4 when the operation size is a longword.
3. Displacement
A displacement is the distance between two points. In this assembly language, the unitof displacement values is in bytes.
4. Start address
Refer to Programmer's Guide, 10.1, "Overview of Automatic Repeat Loop Generation
Function."

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 63 of 391

The values that can be used for the displacement vary with the addressing mode and the operation
size.
Table 3-2

Allowed Displacement Values

Addressing Mode

Displacement*@(disp,Rn)

When the operation size is byte (B):
H'00000000 to H'0000000F (0 to 15)
When the operation size is word (W):
H'00000000 to H'0000001E (0 to 30)
When the operation size is longword (L):
H'00000000 to H'0000003C (0 to 60)@(disp,GBR)

When the operation size is byte (B):
H'00000000 to H'000000FF (0 to 255)
When the operation size is word (W):
H'00000000 to H'000001FE (0 to 510)
When the operation size is longword (L):
H'00000000 to H'000003FC (0 to 1020)@(disp,PC)[When used as an operand of a move instruction]
When the operation size is word (W):
H'00000000 to H'000001FE (0 to 510)
When the operation size is longword (L):
H'00000000 to H'000003FC (0 to 1020)[When used as an operand of an instruction that sets the RS or RE
register (LDRS or LDRE)]
H'FFFFFF00 to H'000000FE (–256 to 254)

Note: Units are bytes, and numbers in parentheses are decimal.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 64 of 391

Table 3-2

Allowed Displacement Values (cont)

Addressing Mode

Displacement*

symbol[When used as a branch instruction operand]
When used as an operand for a conditional branch instruction (BT, BF,
BF/S, or BT/S):
H'00000000 to H'000000FF (0 to 255)
H'FFFFFF00 to H'FFFFFFFF (–256 to –1)
When used as an operand for an unconditional branch instruction(BRA or BSR)
H'00000000 to H'00000FFF (0 to 4095)
H'FFFFF000 to H'FFFFFFFF (–4096 to –1)[When used as the operand of a data move instruction]
When the operation size is word (W):
H'00000000 to H'000001FE (0 to 510)
When the operation size is longword (L):
H'00000000 to H'000003FC (0 to 1020)[When used as an operand of an instruction that sets the RS or RE
register (LDRS or LDRE)]
H'FFFFFF00 to H'000000FE (–256 to 254)

Note: Units are bytes, and numbers in parentheses are decimal.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 65 of 391

The values that can be used for immediate values vary with the executable instruction.
Table 3-3

Allowed Immediate Values

Executable Instruction

Immediate Value

TST, AND, OR, XOR

H'00000000 to H'000000FF(0 to 255)

MOV

H'00000000 to H'000000FF
H'FFFFFF80 to H'FFFFFFFF(0 to 255)(–128 to –1)*1

ADD, CMP/EQ

H'00000000 to H'000000FF(0 to 255)
H'FFFFFF80 to H'FFFFFFFF (–128 to –1)*1

TRAPA

H'00000000 to H'000000FF(0 to 255)

SETRC

H'00000001 to H'000000FF(1 to 255)*2

Notes: 1. Values in the range H'FFFFFF80 to H'FFFFFFFF can be written as positive decimalvalues.
2. When zero is set as the immediate values of the SETRC instruction, warning number
835 occurs and the object code is output as zero. In this case, the range to be repeatedis executed once.
When an import symbol is set as the immediate values of the SETRC instruction, thelinkage editor checks the range from H'00000000 to H'000000FF (0 to 255).

CAUTION!
The assembler corrects the value of displacements under certain conditions.
Condition

Type of Correction

When the operation size is a word and thedisplacement is not a multiple of 2→→→

The lowest bit of the displacement isdiscarded, resulting in the value being a
multiple of 2.

When the operation size is a longword andthe displacement is not a multiple of 4→→→

The lower 2 bits of the displacement are
discarded, resulting in the value being a
multiple of 4.

When the displacement of the branch
instruction is not a multiple of 2→→→

The lowest bit of the displacement isdiscarded, resulting in the value being a
multiple of 2.

Be sure to take this correction into consideration when using operands of the mode @(disp,Rn),@(disp,GBR), and @(disp,PC).
Example: MOV.L @(63,PC),R0
The assembler corrects the 63 to be 60, and generates object code identical to that for thestatement MOV.L @(60,PC),R0, and warning number 870 occurs.
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 66 of 391

3.2

Notes on Executable Instructions

3.2.1

Notes on the Operation Size

The operation size that can be specified vary with the mnemonic and the addressing mode
combination.
SH-1 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations:
Table 3-4 shows the SH-1 allowable executable instruction and operation size combinations.
Table 3-4

SH-1 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 1)

1. Data Move Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

Default when
OmittedMOV#imm,Rn

O

∆

∆

B

MOV

@(disp,PC),Rn

×

O

O

L

MOV

symbol,Rn

×

O

O

L

MOV

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

MOV

Rn,@Rm

O

O

O

L

MOV

@Rn,Rm

O

O

O

L

MOV

Rn,@–Rm

O

O

O

L

MOV

@Rn+,Rm

O

O

O

L

MOV

R0,@(disp,Rn)

O

O

O

L

MOV

Rn,@(disp,Rm)

×

×

O

L

MOV

@(disp,Rn),R0

O

O

O

L

MOV

@(disp,Rn),Rm

×

×

O

L

MOV

Rn,@(R0,Rm)

O

O

O

L

MOV

@(R0,Rn),Rm

O

O

O

L

MOV

R0,@(disp,GBR)

O

O

O

L

MOV

@(disp,GBR),R0

O

O

O

L

MOVA

#imm,R0

×

×

∆

L

MOVA

@(disp,PC),R0

×

×

O

L

MOVA

symbol,R0

×

×

O

L

*1

*2
*3

Notes 1 to 3: See next page.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 67 of 391

Table 3-4

SH-1 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 1) (cont)1. Data Move Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

Default when
Omitted

MOVT

Rn

×

×

O

L

SWAP

Rn,Rm

O

O

×

W

XTRCT

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

Symbol meanings:
Rn, Rm: A general register (R0 to R15)
R0
: General register R0 (when only R0 can be specified)SR: Status register
GBR: Global base register
VBR: Vector base register
MACH, MACL : Multiplication and accumulation register
PR: Procedure registerPC: Program counterimm: An immediate valuedisp: A displacement value
symbol: A symbol
B: ByteW: Word (2 bytes)
L: Longword (4 bytes): Valid specification
O×: Invalid specification:
The assembler regards instructions with this combination as the specification
being omitted.
∆: The assembler regards them as extended instructions.
Notes: 1. In size selection mode, the assembler selects the operation size according to the imm
value.
2. In this case, Rn must be one of R1 to R15.
3. In this case, Rm must be one of R1 to R15.

References:
Extended instructions→ Programmer's Guide, 9.2, "Extended Instructions Related to Automatic Literal Pool
Generation"
Size selection mode
→ Programmer's Guide, 9.3, "Size Mode for Automatic Literal Pool Generation"Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 68 of 391

Table 3-4

SH-1 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 2)

2. Arithmetic Operation Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

Default when
Omitted

ADD

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

ADD

#imm,Rn

×

×

O

L

ADDC

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

ADDV

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

CMP/EQ#imm,R0

×

×

O

L

CMP/EQ

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

CMP/HS

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

CMP/GE

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

CMP/HI

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

CMP/GT

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

CMP/PZ

Rn

×

×

O

L

CMP/PL

Rn

×

×

O

L

CMP/STR

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

DIV1

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

DIV0S

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

×

×

×

—

DIV0U

(no operands)

EXTS

Rn,Rm

O

O

×

W

EXTU

Rn,Rm

O

O

×

W

MAC

@Rn+,@Rm+

×

O

×

W

MULS

Rn,Rm

×

O

O

L

*

MULU

Rn,Rm

×

O

O

L

*

NEG

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

NEGC

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

SUB

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

SUBC

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

SUBV

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

Note: The object code generated when W is specified is the same as that generated when L is
specified.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 69 of 391

Table 3-4

SH-1 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 3)

3. Logic Operation Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

Default when
Omitted

AND

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

AND

#imm,R0

×

×

O

L

AND

#imm,@(R0,GBR)

O

×

×

B

NOT

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

OR

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

OR

#imm,R0

×

×

O

L

OR

#imm,@(R0,GBR)

O

×

×

B

TAS

@Rn

O

×

×

B

TST

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

TST

#imm,R0

×

×

O

L

TST

#imm,@(R0,GBR)

O

×

×

B

XOR

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

XOR

#imm,R0

×

×

O

L

XOR

#imm,@(R0,GBR)

O

×

×

B

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 70 of 391

Table 3-4

SH-1 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 4)

4. Shift Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

Default when
Omitted

ROTL

Rn

×

×

O

L

ROTR

Rn

×

×

O

L

ROTCL

Rn

×

×

O

L

ROTCR

Rn

×

×

O

L

SHAL

Rn

×

×

O

L

SHAR

Rn

×

×

O

L

SHLL

Rn

×

×

O

L

SHLR

Rn

×

×

O

L

SHLL2

Rn

×

×

O

L

SHLR2

Rn

×

×

O

L

SHLL8

Rn

×

×

O

L

SHLR8

Rn

×

×

O

L

SHLL16

Rn

×

×

O

L

SHLR16

Rn

×

×

O

L

Table 3-4

SH-1 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 5)

5. Branch Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

Default when
Omitted

BF

symbol

×

×

×

—

BT

symbol

×

×

×

—

BRA

symbol

×

×

×

—

BSR

symbol

×

×

×

—

JMP

@Rn

×

×

×

—

JSR

@Rn

×

×

×

—

×

×

×

—

RTS

(no operands)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 71 of 391

Table 3-4

SH-1 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 6)

6. System Control Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

B

W

L

Default when
Omitted(no operands)

×

×

×

—

(no operands)

Addressing Mode

CLRT

×

×

×

—

Rn,SR

×

×

O

L

LDC

Rn,GBR

×

×

O

L

LDC

Rn,VBR

×

×

O

L

LDC

@Rn+,SR

×

×

O

L

LDC

@Rn+,GBR

×

×

O

L

LDC

@Rn+,VBR

×

×

O

L

LDS

Rn,MACH

×

×

O

L

LDS

Rn,MACL

×

×

O

L

LDS

Rn,PR

×

×

O

L

LDS

@Rn+,MACH

×

×

O

L

LDS

@Rn+,MACL

×

×

O

L

LDS

@Rn+,PR××

L

CLRMACLDC

NOP(no operands)

×

×

O
×

RTE

(no operands)

×

×

×

—

SETT

(no operands)

×

×

×

—

(no operands)

—

×

×

×

—

STC

SR,Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

GBR,Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

VBR,Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

SR,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

GBR,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

VBR,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

STS

MACH,Rn

×

×

O

L

STS

MACL,Rn

×

×

O

L

STS

PR,Rn

×

×

O

L

STS

MACH,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

STS

MACL,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

STS

PR,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

TRAPA

#imm

×

×

O

L

SLEEP

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 72 of 391

SH-2 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations:
Table 3-5 shows the executable instruction and operation size combinations for the SH-2
instructions added to those of the SH-1.
Table 3-5

SH-2 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 1)

1. Arithmetic Operation Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

Default when
Omitted

MAC@Rn+,@Rm+

×

O

O

W

MUL

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

DMULS

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

DMULU

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

DT

Rn

×

×

×

—

Table 3-5

SH-2 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 2)

2. Branch Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

Default when
Omitted

BF/S

symbol

×

×

×

—

BT/S

symbol

×

×

×

—

BRAF

Rn

×

×

×

—

BSRF

Rn

×

×

×

—

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 73 of 391

SH-2E Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations:
Table 3-6 shows the executable instruction and operation size combinations for the SH-2E
instructions added to those of the SH-2.
Table 3-6

SH-2E Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 1)

1. Data Move Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

S

Default when
Omitted

FLDI0

FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FLDI1

FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

@Rm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

FRn,@Rm

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

@Rm+,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

FRn,@-Rm

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

@(R0,Rm),FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

FRm,@(R0,Rm)

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

Symbol meanings:
FRm,FRn : Floating-point registerFR0: FR0 floating-point register (when only FR0 can be specified)
FPUL: FPU low registerFPSCR: FPU status control registerS: Single precision (4 bytes)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 74 of 391

Table 3-6

SH-2E Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 2)

2. Arithmetic Operation Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

S

Default when
Omitted

FABS

FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FADD

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FCMP/EQ

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FCMP/GT

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FDIV

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FMAC

FR0,FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FMUL

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FNEG

FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FSUB

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

Table 3-6

SH-2E Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 3)

3. System Control Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

S

Default when
OmittedFLDS

FRm,FPUL

×

×

×

O

S

FLOAT

FPUL,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FSTS

FPUL,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FTRC

FRm,FPUL

×

×

×

O

S

LDS

Rm,FPUL

×

×

O

×

L

LDS

@Rm+,FPUL

×

×

O

×

L

LDS

Rm,FPSCR

×

×

O

×

L

LDS

@Rm+,FPSCR

×

×

O

×

L

STS

FPUL,Rn

×

×

O

×

L

STS

FPUL,@-Rn

×

×

O

×

L

STS

FPSCR,Rn

×

×

O

×

L

STS

FPSCR,@-Rn

×

×

O

×

L

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 75 of 391

SH-3 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations:
Table 3-7 shows the executable instruction and operation size combinations for the SH-3
instructions added to those of the SH-2.
Table 3-7

SH-3 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 1)

1. Data Move Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

Default when
Omitted

PREF

@Rn

×

×

×

—

Symbol meanings:
Rn_BANK : Bank general register
SSR: Save status register
SPC: Save program counter

Table 3-7

SH-3 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 2)

2. Shift Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

Default when
Omitted

SHAD

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

SHLD

Rn,Rm

×

×

O

L

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 76 of 391

Table 3-7

SH-3 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 3)

3. System Control Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

B

W

L

Default when
OmittedAddressing Mode

CLRS

(no operands)

×

×

×

—

SETS

(no operands)

×

×

×

—

LDC

Rm,SSR

×

×

O

L

LDC

Rm,SPC

×

×

O

L

LDC

Rm,Rn_BANK

×

×

O

L

LDC

@Rm+,SSR

×

×

O

L

LDC

@Rm+,SPC

×

×

O

L

LDC

@Rm+,Rn_BANK

×

×

O

L

STC

SSR,Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

SPC,Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

Rm_BANK,Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

SSR,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

SPC,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

Rm_BANK,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

×

×

×

—

LDTLB

(no operands)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 77 of 391

SH-3E Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations:
Table 3-8 shows the executable instruction and operation size combinations for the SH-3E
instructions added to those of the SH-3.
Table 3-8

SH-3E Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 1)

1. Data Move Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

S

Default when
Omitted

FLDI0

FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FLDI1

FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

@Rm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

FRm,@Rn

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

@Rm+,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

FRm,@–Rn

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

@(R0,Rm),FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

FRn,@(R0,Rn)

×

×

×

O

S

FMOV

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

Symbol meanings:
FRm,FRn : Floating-point registerFR0: FR0 floating-point register (when only FR0 can be specified)
FPUL: FPU low registerFPSCR: FPU status control registerS: Single precision (4 bytes)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 78 of 391

Table 3-8

SH-3E Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 2)

2. Arithmetic Operation Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

S

Default when
Omitted

FABS

FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FADD

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FCMP/EQ

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FCMP/GT

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FDIV

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FMAC

FR0,FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FMUL

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FNEG

FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FSQRT

FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FSUB

FRm,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

Table 3-8

SH-3E Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 3)

3. System Control Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

S

Default when
OmittedFLDS

FRm,FPUL

×

×

×

O

S

FLOAT

FPUL,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FSTS

FPUL,FRn

×

×

×

O

S

FTRC

FRm,FPUL

×

×

×

O

S

LDS

Rm,FPUL

×

×

O

×

L

LDS

@Rm+,FPUL

×

×

O

×

L

LDS

Rm,FPSCR

×

×

O

×

L

LDS

@Rm+,FPSCR

×

×

O

×

L

STS

FPUL,Rn

×

×

O

×

L

STS

FPUL,@–Rn

×

×

O

×

L

STS

FPSCR,Rn

×

×

O

×

L

STS

FPSCR,@–Rn

×

×

O

×

L

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 79 of 391

SH-4 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations:
Table 3-9 shows the executable instruction and operation size combinations for the SH-4
instructions added to those of the SH-3E.
Table 3-9

SH-4 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 1)

1. Data Move Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

S

D

Default when
OmittedFMOV

DRm,DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

DRm,@Rn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

DRm,@-Rn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

DRm,@(R0,Rn)

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

@Rm,DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

@Rm+,DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

@(R0,Rm),DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

DRm,XDn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

XDm,DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

XDm,XDn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

XDm,@Rn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

XDm,@-Rn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

XDm,@(R0,Rn)

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

@Rm,XDn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

@Rm+,XDn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FMOV

@(R0,Rm),XDn

×

×

×

×

O

D

Symbol meanings:
DRm,DRn : Double-precision floating-point register
XDm,XDn : Extended double-precision floating-point register
FVm,FVn : Single-precision floating-point vector register
XMTRX: Single-precision floating-point extended register matrix
DBR: Debug vector base register
SGR: Save general register 15
D: Double precision (8 bytes)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 80 of 391

Table 3-9

SH-4 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 2)

2. Arithmetic Operation Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

S

D

Default when
Omitted

FABS

DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FADD

DRm,DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FCMP/EQ

DRm,DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FCMP/GTDRm,DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FDIV

DRm,DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FIPR

FVm,FVn

×

×

×

O

×

S

FMUL

DRm,DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FNEG

DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FSQRT

DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FSUB

DRm,DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FTRV

XMTRX,FVn

×

×

×

O

×

S

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 81 of 391

Table 3-9

SH-4 Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations (Part 3)

3. System Control Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

S

D

Default when
OmittedFCNVDS

DRm,FPUL

×

×

×

×

O

D

FCNVSD

FPUL,DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FLOAT

FPUL,DRn

×

×

×

×

O

D

FRCHG

(no operands) ×

×

×

×

×

—

FSCHG

(no operands) ×

×

×

×

×

—

FTRC

DRm,FPUL

×

×

×

×

O

D

LDC

Rm,DBR

×

×

O

×

×

L

LDC

@Rm+,DBR

×

×

O

×

×

L

OCBI

@Rn

×

×

×

×

O

—

OCBP

@Rn

×

×

×

×

O

—

OCBWB

@Rn

×

×

×

×

O

—

STC

DBR,Rn

×

×

O

×

×

L

STC

DBR,@-Rn

×

×

O

×

×

L

STC

SGR,Rn

×

×

O

×

×

L

STC

SGR,@-Rn

×

×

O

×

×

L

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 82 of 391

SH-DSP, SH3-DSP Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations:
Table 3-10 shows the executable instruction and operation size combinations for the SH-DSP and
SH3-DSP instructions added to those of the SH-2 and SH-3, respectively.
Table 3-10 SH-DSP, SH3-DSP Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations(Part 1)
1. Repeat Control Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

Default when
OmittedLDRS@(disp,PC)

×

×

O

L

LDRS

symbol

×

×

O

L

LDRE

@(disp,PC)

×

×

O

L

LDRE

symbol

×

×

O

L

SETRC

Rn

×

×

×

—

SETRC

#imm

×

×

×

—

Symbol meanings:
MOD : Modulo register
RS: Repeat start registerRE: Repeat end register
DSR : DSP status register
A0: DSP data register (A0, X0, X1, Y0, or Y1 can be specified.)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 83 of 391

Table 3-10 SH-DSP, SH3-DSP Executable Instruction and Operation Size Combinations(Part 2)
2. System Control Instructions

Operation Sizes

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

B

W

L

Default when
OmittedLDC

Rn,MOD

×

×

O

L

LDC

Rn,RS

×

×

O

L

LDC

Rn,RE

×

×

O

L

LDC

@Rn+,MOD

×

×

O

L

LDC

@Rn+,RS

×

×

O

L

LDC

@Rn+,RE

×

×

O

L

LDS

Rn,DSR

×

×

O

L

LDS

Rn,A0

×

×

O

L

LDS

@Rn+,DSR

×

×

O

L

LDS

@Rn+,A0

×

×

O

L

STC

MOD,Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

RS,Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

RE,Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

MOD,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

RS,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

STC

RE,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

STS

DSR,Rn

×

×

O

L

STS

A0,Rn

×

×

O

L

STS

DSR,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

STS

A0,@–Rn

×

×

O

L

3.2.2

Notes on Delayed Branch Instructions

The unconditional branch instructions are delayed branch instructions. The microprocessors
execute the delay slot instruction (the instruction directly following a branch instruction inmemory) before executing the delayed branch instruction.
If an instruction inappropriate for a delay slot is specified, the assembler issues error number 150
or 151.
Table 3-11 shows the relationship between the delayed branch instructions and the delay slot
instructions.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 84 of 391

Table 3-11 Relationship between Delayed Branch Instructions and Delay Slot Instructions
Delayed Branch
Delay Slot

BF/S BT/S BRAF BSRF BRA BSR JMP JSR RTS RTE

BF

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

BT

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

BF/S

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

BT/S

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

BRAF

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

BSRF

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

BRA

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

BSR

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

JMP

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

JSR

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

RTS

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

RTE

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

TRAPA

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

Rn,SR

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

@Rn+,SR

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

LDC
MOV

@(disp,PC),Rn

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

symbol,Rn

*2

*2

×

×

*2

*2

×

×

×

×

@(disp,PC),R0

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

symbol,R0

*2

*2

×

×

*2

*2

×

×

×

×

Extended

MOV.L #imm,Rn ×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

instructions

MOV.W #imm,Rn ×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

MOVA

#imm,R0 ×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

Any other instruction

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

MOVA

Symbol meanings:
O : Normal, i.e., the assembler generates the specified object code.
× : Error 150 or 151
The instruction specified is inappropriate as a delay slot instruction.
The assembler generates object code with a NOP instruction (H'0009).
Notes: 1. Operates normally when the CPU type is SH-1, SH-2, SH-2E, or SH-DSP.
Any other CPU type will cause error 150 or 151 to occur.
2. When the CPU type is SH-4, error 150 or 151 occurs.
Any other CPU type will cause warning 871 to occur.
Note on the value of PC: PC = <destination address for the delayed branch
instruction> + 2
The assembler generates the specified object code.
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 85 of 391

CAUTION!
If the delayed branch instruction and the delay slot instruction are coded in different sections, theassembler does not check the validity of the delay slot instruction.
Reference:
Extended Instructions→ Programmer's Guide, 9.2, "Extended Instructions Related to Automatic Literal Pool
Generation"
3.2.3

Notes on Address Calculations

When the operand addressing mode is PC relative with displacement, i.e., @(disp,PC), the valueof PC must be taken into account in coding. The value of PC can vary depending on certain
conditions.
(1) Normal Case
The value of PC is the first address in the currently executing instruction plus 4 bytes.
Examples: (Consider the state when a MOV instruction is being executed at absolute address
H'00001000.)
MemoryAbsolute addresses
H'00001000
PC

MOV.L @(8,PC),R0

H'00001004
disp = 8 bytes
H'0000100C

Area to beaccessed

2 bytesFigure 3-1 Address Calculation Example (Normal Case)
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 86 of 391

(2) During the Delay Slot Instruction
The value of PC is destination address for the delayed branch instruction plus 2 bytes.
Examples: (Consider the state when a MOV instruction is being executed at absolute address
H'00001000.)
MemoryAbsolute addresses
H'00001000

L1 = H'00001006
PC

BRA L1
MOV.L @(8,PC),R0

Delayed branch
destination

H'00001008
disp = 8 bytes
H'00001010

Area to beaccessed

2 bytesFigure 3-2 Address Calculation Example (When the Value of PC Differs Due to a Branch)
Supplement:
When the operand is the PC relative specified with the symbol, the assembler derives thedisplacement taking account of the value of PC when generating the object code.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 87 of 391

(3) During the Execution of Either a MOV.L @(disp,PC),Rn or a MOVA @(disp,PC),R0
When the value of PC is not a multiple of 4, microprocessors correct the value by discarding thelower 2 bits when calculating addresses.
Examples: 1.

When the microprocessor corrects the value of PC(Consider the state when a MOV instruction is being executed at address
H'00001002.)
MemoryAddress
H'00001002

MOV.L @(8,PC),R0

H'00001004
PC H'00001006
disp = 8 bytes
The value of the PC
is corrected to bea multiple of 4.

H'0000100C

Area to be accessed

2 bytesFigure 3-3 Address Calculation Example (When Microprocessor Corrects the Value of PC)
2.

When the microprocessor does not correct the value of PC(Consider the state when a MOV instruction is being executed at address
H'00001000.)
MemoryAddress
H'00001000

MOV.L @(8,PC),R0

PC H'00001004
disp = 8 bytes
The value of the PC
is not changed.

H'0000100C

Area to be accessed

2 bytesFigure 3-4 Address Calculation Example (When Microprocessor Does Not Correct
the Value of PC)
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 88 of 391

Supplement:
When the operand is the PC relative specified with the symbol, the assembler derives thedisplacement taking account of the value of PC when generating the object code.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 89 of 391

Section 4 DSP Instructions
4.1

Program Contents

4.1.1

Source Statements

The SH-DSP instructions are classified into two types: executable instructions and DSP
instructions. The DSP instructions manipulate DSP registers. The instruction set and description
format of DSP instructions are different from those of the executable instructions. For the DSP
instructions, many operations can be included in one statement. The DSP instruction operation is
as follows:
1. DSP operation: Specifies operations between DSP registers.
PABS, PADD, PADDC, PAND, PCLR, PCMP, PCOPY, PDEC, PDMSB, PINC, PLDS,PMULS, PNEG, POR, PRND, PSHA, PSHL, PSTS, PSUB, PSUBC, PXOR
2. X data transfer operation: Specifies data transfer between a DSP register and X data memory.
MOVX, NOPX
3. Y data transfer operation: Specifies data transfer between a DSP register and Y data memory.
MOVY, NOPY
4. Single data transfer operation: Specifies data transfer between a DSP register and memory.
MOVS
Reference:
Executable instructions→ Programmer's Guide, 3, "Executable Instructions"Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 91 of 391

4.1.2

Parallel Operation Instructions

Parallel operation instructions specify DSP operations as well as data transfer between a DSP
register and X or Y data memory at the same time. The instruction size is 32 bits. The description
format is as follows:[<label>][∆<DSP operation part>][∆<data transfer part>][<comment>]

DSP Operation Part Description Format:[<condition>∆]<DSP operation>∆<operand>[∆<DSP operation>∆<operand>]• Condition: Specifies how parallel operation instruction is executed as follows:
DCT: The instruction is executed when the DC bit is 1.
DCF: The instruction is executed when the DC bit is 0.
• DSP operation: Specifies DSP operation.
PADD and PMULS, and PSUB and PMULS can be specified in combination.
Data Transfer Part Description Format:[<X data transfer operation>[∆<operand>]][∆<Y data transfer operation>[∆<operand>]]

Be sure to specify X data transfer and Y data transfer in this order. Inputting an instruction is not
required when the data move instruction is NOPX or NOPY.
Example:LABEL1: PADD A0,M0,A0 PMULS X0,Y0,M0
Label
DSP operation part
DCT PINC X1,A1
DSP operation part

MOVX.W @R4+,X0 MOVY.W @R6+,Y0
Data transfer part

MOVX.W @R4,X0 MOVY.W @R6+, Y0
Data transfer part

PCMP X1, M0
MOVX.W @R4, X0 ;Y Memory transfer is omitted
DSP operation part Data transfer part
Comment

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 92 of 391;DSP Instruction
Comment

4.1.3

Data Move Instructions

Two types of data move instructions are available: combination of X data memory transfer and Y
data memory transfer, and single data transfer. The description formats are as follows:
Combination of X Data Memory Move and Y Data Memory Move Instructions:[<label>][∆<X data transfer operation>[∆<operand>]][∆<Y data transfer operation>[∆<operand>]][<comment>]

Be sure to specify X data memory transfer and Y data memory transfer in this order. Inputting an
instruction is not required when the data move instruction is NOPX or NOPY. Note that both X
data memory and Y data memory cannot be omitted, unlike the parallel operation instruction.
Example:LABEL2:; Data move instruction(Y data memory transfer is omitted)

MOVX.W @R4,X0
MOVX.W @R4,X0 MOVY.W @R6+, Y0

Single Data Move Instruction:[<label>][∆<single data transfer operation>∆<operand>][<comment>]

Specifies the MOVS instruction.
Example:LABEL3:

MOVS.W @-R2,A0; Single data transfer

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 93 of 391

4.1.4

Coding of Source Statements Across Multiple Lines

For the DSP instructions, many operations can be included in one statement, and therefore, source
statements become long and complicated. To make programs easy to read, source statements for
DSP instructions can be written across multiple lines by separating between an operand and an
operation, in addition to separating at a comma between operands.
Write source statements across multiple lines using the following procedure.
1. Insert a new line between an operand and an operation.
2. Insert a plus sign (+) in the first column of the new line.
3. Continue writing the source statement following the plus sign.
Spaces and tabs can be inserted following the plus sign.
Example:

+
+
+

PADD
PMULS
MOVX
MOVY

A0,M0,X0
A1,Y1,M0@R4,x0@R6,Y1; A single source statement is written across four lines.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 94 of 391

4.2

DSP Instructions

4.2.1

DSP Operation Instructions

Table 4-1 lists DSP instructions in mnemonic.
Table 4-1

DSP Instructions in Mnemonic

Instruction Name

Mnemonic

DSP arithmetic operation instructions

PADD, PSUB, PCOPY, PDMSB, PINC, PNEG, PMULS,PADDC, PSUBC, PCMP, PDEC, PABS, PRND, PCLR,
PLDS, PSTS

DSP logic operation instructions

POR, PAND, PXORDSP shift operation instructions

PSHA, PSHL

Operation Size:
For the DSP operation instructions, operation size cannot be specified.
Addressing Mode:
Table 4-2 lists addressing modes for the DSP operation instructions.
Table 4-2

Addressing Modes for DSP Operation Instructions

Addressing Mode

Description Format

DSP register direct

Dp (DSP register name)

Immediate data

#imm

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 95 of 391

• DSP register direct
Table 4-3 lists registers that can be specified in DSP register direct addressing mode. For Sx,
Sy, Dz, Du, Se, Sf, and Dg, refer to table 4-5, DSP Operation Instructions.
Table 4-3

Registers that Can Be Specified in DSP Register Direct Addressing ModeDSP Register

Dp

Sx

A0

A1

Yes

Yes

Sy
Dz

Yes

Du

Yes

Yes

M0

M1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

X0

X1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Se

Yes

Yes

Sf

Yes

Yes

Dg

Yes

Yes

Yes

Y0

Y1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes

Yes

• Immediate data
Immediate data can be specified for the first operand of the PSHA and PSHL instructions. The
following items can be specified: Value type
Constants, symbols, or expressions can be specified.
 Symbol types
Symbols including relative and import symbols can be specified as immediate data.*
 Value range
Table 4-4 lists the specifiable value ranges.
Table 4-4

Ranges of Immediate Data

Instruction

Range

PSHA instruction

H'FFFFFFE0 to H'00000020 (–32 to 32)

PSHL instruction

H'FFFFFFF0 to H'00000010 (–16 to 16)

Note: When a relative symbol or import symbol is specified as immediate data, the linkage
editor checks the value in the rage from H'FFFFFFC0 to H'0000003F (–64 to 63).

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 96 of 391

Combination of Multiple DSP Operation Instructions:
The PADD instruction and the PMULS instruction, or the PSUB instruction and the PMULS
instruction can be specified in combination. Each of these two combinations is basically one DSP
instruction. The PADD (or PSUB) operand and a PMULS operand are separately described so that
programs can be read easily.
Example:

PADD A0,M0,A0 PMULS X0,Y0,M0 NOPX MOVY.W @R6+, Y0
PSUB A1,M1,A1 PMULS X1,Y1,M1 MOVX @R4+,X0 NOPY

Note: Warning 701 is displayed if the same register is specified as the destination registers when
multiple DSP operation instructions are specified in combination.
Example:
PADD A0,M0,A0 PMULS X0,Y0,A0→ Warning 701

Conditional DSP Operation Instructions:
Conditional DSP operation instructions specify if the program is executed according to the DC bitof the DSR register.
DCT: When the DC bit is 1, the instruction is executed.
DCF: When the DC bit is 0, the instruction is executed.
Conditional DSP operation instructions are the following:
PADD, PAND, PCLR, PCOPY, PDEC, PDMSB, PINC, PLDS, PNEG, POR, PSHA, PSHL,
PSTS, PSUB, PXORDSP Operation Instruction List:
Table 4-5 lists DSP operation instructions. For the registers that can be specified as Sx, Sy, Dz,
Du, Se, Sf, and Dg, refer to table 4-3, Registers that Can Be Specified in DSP Register Direct
Addressing Mode.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 97 of 391

Table 4-5

DSP Operation Instructions

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

PABS

Sx, DzPABS

Sx, DzPADD

Sx, Sy, Dz

PADD

Sx, Sy, Du

PADDC

Sx, Sy, Dz

PAND

Sx, Sy, Dz

PCLR

Dz

PCMP

Sx, SyPCOPY

Sx, DzPCOPY

Sy, DzPDEC

Sx, DzPDEC

Sy, DzPDMSBSx, DzPDMSBSy, DzPINC

Sx, DzPINC

Sy, DzPLDSDz, MACH

PLDS

Dz, MACL

PMULS

Se, Sf, Dg

PNEG

Sx, DzPNEG

Sy, DzPOR

Sx, Sy, Dz

PRND

Sx, DzPRND

Sy, DzPSHA#imm, Dz

PSHA

Sx, Sy, Dz

PSHL#imm, Dz

PSHL

Sx, Sy, Dz

PSTS

MACH, Dz

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 98 of 391

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

PMULS

Se, Sf, Dg

Table 4-5

DSP Operation Instructions (cont)Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

PSTS

MACL, Dz

PSUB

Sx, Sy, Dz

PSUB

Sx, Sy, Du

PSUBC

Sx, Sy, Dz

PXOR

Sx, Sy, Dz

4.2.2

Mnemonic

Addressing Mode

PMULS

Se, Sf, Dg

Data Move Instructions

Mnemonics:
Two types of data move instructions are available: dual memory move instructions and single
memory move instructions.
Dual memory move instructions specify data move, at the same time, between x memory and a
DSP register, and between Y memory and a DSP register.
Single memory move instructions specify data move between arbitrary memory and a DSP
register. Table 4-6 lists data move instructions in mnemonic.
Table 4-6

Data Move Instructions in Mnemonic

Classification
Dual memory move

Mnemonic
X memory move

NOPX
MOVX

Y memory move

NOPY
MOVY

Single memory move

MOVS

Operation Size:
NOPX and NOPY instructions:Operation size cannot be specified.

MOVX and MOVY instructions:

Only word size (.W) can be specified. If omitted, word size is
specified.

MOVS instruction:

Word size (.W) or longword size (.L) can be specified. If
omitted, longword size is specified.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 99 of 391

Addressing Mode:
Table 4-7 lists addressing modes that can be specified for the data move instructions.
Table 4-7

Addressing Modes of Data Move Instructions

Addressing mode

Description

DSP register direct

Dz

Register indirect@Az

Register indirect with post-increment@Az+

Register indirect with index/post-increment@Az+IzRegister indirect with pre-decrement@-Az

Register indirect with index/post-increment is a special addressing mode for the DSP data move
instructions. In this mode, after referring to the contents indicated by register Az, register Azcontents are incremented by the value of the Iz register.
Registers that Can Be Specified in Addressing Modes:
Table 4-8 lists registers that can be specified in the DSP register direct, register indirect, register
indirect with post-increment, register indirect with index/post-increment, and register indirect withpre-decrement addressing modes. For Dx, Dy, Ds, Da, Ax, Ay, As, Ix, Iy, and Is, refer to table 49, Data Move Instructions.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 100 of 391

Table 4-8

Registers that Can Be Specified in Addressing Modes for Data MoveInstructions
General Register

DSP RegisterR2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9

A0 A1 M0 M1 X0 X1 Y0 Y1 A0G A1G

Dz Dx

Yes YesDy

Yes YesDs

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes YesDa

Yes YesAz Ax

Yes YesAyAs

Yes YesYes Yes Yes Yes

Iz Ix

Yes

Iy

Yes

Is

Yes

Note: Warning 703 is displayed if the destination register for the DSP instruction and thedestination register for the data move instruction are the same register, and if the
instructions are in the same statement.
Example:

PADD A0,M0,Y0

NOPX

MOVY.W @R6+,Y0 → Warning 703

Data Move Instruction List:
Table 4-9 lists data move instructions. For registers that can be specified for Dx, Dy, Ds, Da, Ax,
Ay, As, Ix, Iy, and Is, refer to table 4-8, Registers that Can Be Specified in Addressing Modes for
Data Move Instructions.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 101 of 391

Table 4-9

Data Move Instructions

Classification

Mnemonic

X data move instructions

NOPX

Y data move instructions

Single data move instructions

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 102 of 391

Addressing Mode

MOVX.W@Ax, Dx

MOVX.W@Ax+, Dx

MOVX.W@Ax+Ix, Dx

MOVX.W

Da, @Ax

MOVX.W

Da, @Ax+

MOVX.W

Da, @Ax+Ix

NOPY
MOVY.W@Ay, Dy

MOVY.W@Ay+, Dy

MOVY.W@Ay+Iy, Dy

MOVY.W

Da, @Ay

MOVY.W

Da, @Ay+

MOVY.W

Da, @Ay+Iy

MOVS.W@-As, Ds

MOVS.W@As, Ds

MOVS.W@As+, Ds

MOVS.W@As+Is, Ds

MOVS.W

Ds, @-As

MOVS.W

Ds, @As

MOVS.W

Ds, @As+

MOVS.W

Ds, @As+Is

MOVS.L@-As, Ds

MOVS.L@As, Ds

MOVS.L@As+, Ds

MOVS.L@As+Is, Ds

MOVS.LDs, @-As

MOVS.LDs, @As

MOVS.LDs, @As+

MOVS.LDs, @As+Is

Section 5 Assembler Directives
5.1

Overview of the Assembler Directives

The assembler directives are instructions that the assembler interprets and executes. Table 5-1 lists
the assembler directives provided by this assembler.
Table 5-1

Assembler Directives

Type

Mnemonic

FunctionTarget CPU.CPU

Specifies the target CPU.

Section and the location
counter.SECTION

Declares a section.

.ORG

Sets the value of the location counter.

.ALIGN

Corrects the value of the location counter.

.EQU

Sets a symbol value (reset not allowed).

.ASSIGN

Sets a symbol value (reset allowed).

.REG

Defines the alias of a register name.

.FREG

Defines a floating-point register name.

.DATA

Reserves integer data.

.DATAB

Reserves integer data blocks.

.SDATA

Reserves character string data.

.SDATAB

Reserves character string data blocks.

.SDATAC

Reserves character string data (with length).

.SDATAZ

Reserves character string data (with zeroterminator).

.FDATA

Reserves floating-point data.

.FDATAB

Reserves floating-point data blocks.

.XDATA

Reserves fixed-point data.

.RES

Reserves data area.

.SRES

Reserves character string data area.

.SRESC

Reserves character string data area (with length).

.SRESZ

Reserves character string data area (with zeroterminator).

.FRES

Reserves floating-point data area.

Symbols

Data and data area
reservationRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 103 of 391

Table 5-1

Assembler Directives (cont)Type

Mnemonic

Function

Export and import symbol.EXPORT

Declares export symbols.

.IMPORT

Declares import symbols.

Object modules

Assemble listing

Other directives.GLOBAL

Declares export and import symbols.

.OUTPUT

Controls object module output.

.DEBUG

Controls the output of symbolic debug information.

.ENDIAN

Selects big endian or little endian.

.LINE

Changes line number.

.PRINT

Controls assemble listing output.

.LIST

Controls the output of the source program listing.

.FORM

Sets the number of lines and columns in theassemble listing.

.HEADING

Sets the header for the source program listing.

.PAGE

Inserts a new page in the source program listing.

.SPACE

Outputs blank lines to the source program listing.

.PROGRAM

Sets the name of the object module.

.RADIX

Sets the radix in which integer constants with noradix specifier are interpreted.

.END

Declares the end of the source program.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 104 of 391

5.2

Assembler Directive Reference

5.2.1

Target CPU Assembler Directive

This assemble provides the following assembler directive concerned with the target CPU.

.CPU
Specifies the target CPU.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 105 of 391

.CPU
Target CPU Specification
Syntax∆.CPU∆<target CPU>

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .CPU mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the target CPU.
Specification

Target CPU

SH1

Assembles program for SH-1

SH2

Assembles program for SH-2

SH2E

Assembles program for SH-2E

SH3

Assembles program for SH-3

SH3E

Assembles program for SH-3E

SH4

Assembles program for SH-4

SHDSP

Assembles program for SH-DSP

SH3DSP

Assembles program for SH3-DSP

This directive determines the target CPU. If it is omitted, the CPU specified by the SHCPU
environment variable becomes valid.
Reference: SHCPU environment variable→ User's Guide, 1.3, "SHCPU Environment Variable"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 106 of 391

.CPU

Description
1. .CPU is the assembler directive that specifies the target CPU for which the source program isassembled.
2. The following CPUs can be selected:• SH1 (for SH-1)• SH2 (for SH-2)• SH2E (for SH-2E)• SH3 (for SH-3)• SH3E (for SH-3E)• SH4 (for SH-4)• SHDSP (for SH-DSP)• SH3DSP (for SH3-DSP)
3. Specify this directive at the beginning of the source program. If it is not specified at the
beginning, an error will occur. However, directives related to assembly listing can be written
before this directive.
4. When several .CPU directives are specified, only the first specification becomes valid.
5. The assembler gives priority to target CPU specification in the order of –CPU, .CPU, and the
SHCPU environment variable.
Coding Example
.CPU

SH2

.SECTION A,CODE,ALIGN=4
MOV.L R0,R1
MOV.L R0,R2
Assembles program for SH-2.

Reference: –CPU
→ User's Guide, 2.2.1, "CPU Command Line Option" –CPU
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 107 of 391

5.2.2

Section and Location Counter Assembler Directives

This assembler provides the following assembler directives concerned with sections and thelocation counter.

.SECTION
Declares a section.

.ORG
Sets the value of the location counter.

.ALIGN
Adjusts the value of the location counter to a multiple of the boundary alignment value.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 108 of 391

.SECTION
Section Declaration
Syntax∆.SECTION∆<section name> [,<section attribute>[,{LOCATE= <start address>|ALIGN=<boundary alignment value>}]]Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .SECTION mnemonic.
3. Operands— First operand: the section name
The rules for section names are the same as the rules for symbols.
References: Naming sections→ Programmer's Guide, 1.3.2, "Coding of Symbols"— Second operand: the section attribute
Attribute

Section TypeCODE

Code section

DATA

Data section

STACK

Stack section

COMMON

Common section

DUMMY

Dummy section

The shaded section indicates the default value when the specifier is omitted.

When the specification is omitted, the section will be a code section.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 109 of 391

.SECTION— Third operand: start address or boundary alignment value
Specification

Section TypeLOCATE = <start address>

Absolute address section

ALIGN = <boundary alignment value>

Relative address section

No specification

Relative address section (boundaryalignment value = 4)

The specification determines whether the section type will be an absolute address section
or a relative address section.
Description
1. .SECTION is the section declaration assembler directive.
A section is a part of a program, and the linkage editor regards it as a unit of processing. The
following describes section declaration using the simple examples shown below.
Source program.SECTION

CD,CODE,ALIGN=4

Source statement set 1*.SECTION

DT,DATA,ALIGN=4

Source statement set 2 *.SECTION

DM,DUMMY

Source statement set 3 *.ENDThis statement declares the start ofsection CD.
This part of the source program
belongs to section CD.
This statement declares the startof section DT.
This part of the source program
belongs to section DT.
This statement declares the start ofsection DM.
This part of the source program
belongs to section DM.
This statement declares the end of thesource program.

Note: This example assumes that the .SECTION
directive does not appear in any of the source
statement sets 1 to 3.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 110 of 391

.SECTION

2. It is possible to redeclare (and thus restart, i.e., re-enter) a section that was previously declaredin the same file. The following is a simple example of section restart.
Source program.SECTION

CD,CODE,ALIGN=4

Source statement set 1*.SECTION

This statement declares the start ofsection CD.
This part of the source program
belongs to section CD.

DT,DATA,ALIGN=4

Source statement set 2 *.SECTION

CD

Source statement set 3 *This statement declares the restartof section CD.
This part of the source program
also belongs to section CD.
(This part of the program is acontinuation of source statement set 1.).END
Note: This example assumes that the .SECTION
directive does not appear in any of the source
statement sets 1 to 3.

CAUTION!
When using the .SECTION directive to restart a section, the second and third operands must be
omitted. (The original specifications when first declaring the section remain valid.)
3. Use LOCATE = <start address> as the third operand when starting an absolute address section.
The start address is the absolute address of the start of that section.
The start address must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
The values allowed for the start address are from H'00000000 to H'FFFFFFFF. (From 0 to
4,294,967,295 in decimal.)Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 111 of 391

.SECTION

4. Use ALIGN = <boundary alignment value> to start a relative address section. The linkage
editor will adjust the start address of the section to be a multiple of the boundary alignment
value.
The boundary alignment value must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
The values allowed for the boundary alignment value are powers of 2, e.g. 20, 21, 22, ..., 231.
For code sections, the values must be 4 or larger powers of 2, e.g. 22, 23, 24, ..., 231.
5. The assembler provides a default section for the following cases:— The use of executable or extended instructions when no section has been declared.
— The use of data reservation assembler directives when no section has been declared.
— The use of the .ALIGN directive when no section has been declared.
— The use of the .ORG directive when no section has been declared.
— Reference to the location counter when no section has been declared.
— The use of statements consisting of only the label field when no section has been declared.
The default section is the following section:— Section name: P— Section type: Code section
Relative address section (with a boundary alignment value of 4)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 112 of 391

.SECTION

Coding Example.ALIGN4; This section of the program belongs to the default section P.

.DATA.L

H'11111111; The default section P is a code section, and is a relative~; address section with a boundary alignment value of 4.

.SECTION CD,CODE,ALIGN=4

MOV

R0,R1

; This section of the program belongs to the section CD.

MOV

R0,R2

; The section CD is a code section, and is a relative address~; section with a boundary alignment value of 4.

.SECTION DT,DATA,LOCATE=H'00001000

X1:.DATA.L

H'22222222; This section of the program belongs to the section DT.

.DATA.L

H'33333333; The section DT is a data section, and is an absolute address~; section with a start address of H'00001000.

.END

∼

Note: This example assumes the .SECTION directive does not appear in the parts indicated by" ".

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 113 of 391

.ORG
Location-Counter-Value Setting
Syntax∆.ORG∆<location-counter-value>

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .ORG mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the new value for the location counter.
Description
1. .ORG is the assembler directive that sets the value of the location counter. The .ORG directive
is used to place executable instructions or data at a specific address.
2. The location-counter-value must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value or an address within the section,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
The values allowed for the location-counter-value are from H'00000000 to H'FFFFFFFF.
(From 0 to 4,294,967,295 in decimal.)
When the location-counter-value is specified with an absolute value, the following condition
must be satisfied:<location-counter-value> ≥ <section start address> (when compared as unsigned values)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 114 of 391

.ORG

3. The assembler handles the value of the location counter as follows:— The value is regarded as an absolute address value within an absolute address section.
— The value is regarded as a relative address value (relative distance from the section head)
within a relative address section.
Coding Example.SECTION

DT,DATA,LOCATE=H'FFFF0000.DATA.L

H'11111111.ORG

H'FFFF0010; This statement sets the value of the location; counter.

.DATA.L

H'22222222∼; The integer data H'22222222 is stored at; absolute address H'FFFF0010.

Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAbsolute address
H’FFFF0000

Absolute address
H’FFFF0010

H'11111111
Locations from H’FFFF0004
to H’FFFF000F are notchanged due to the use of
the .ORG assembler directive.
H'22222222

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 115 of 391

.ALIGN
Location-Counter-Value Correction
Syntax∆.ALIGN∆<boundary alignment value>

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .ALIGN mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the boundary alignment value.
Description
1. .ALIGN is the assembler directive that corrects the location-counter-value to be a multiple ofthe boundary alignment value. Executable instructions and data can be allocated on specificboundary values (address multiples) by using the .ALIGN directive.
2. The boundary alignment value must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
The values allowed for the boundary alignment value are powers of 2, e.g. 20, 21, 22, ..., 231.
3. When .ALIGN is used in a relative section the following must be satisfied:Boundary alignment value specified by .SECTION ≥ Boundary alignment value specified by.ALIGN

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 116 of 391

.ALIGN

4. When .ALIGN is used in a code section, the assembler inserts NOP instructions in the object
code* to adjust the value of the location counter. Odd byte size areas are filled with H'09.
Note: This object code is not displayed in the assemble listing.
When .ALIGN is used in a data, dummy, or stack section, the assembler only adjusts the valueof the location counter, and does not fill in any object code in memory.
Coding Example∼.SECTION

P,code.DATA.B.DATA.B.DATA.B

H'11
H'22
H'33

.ALIGN.DATA.W

2
H'4444; This statement adjusts the value of the location; counter to be a multiple of 2.

.ALIGN.DATA.L

4
H'55555555; This statement adjusts the value of the location; counter to be a multiple of 4.

∼

Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
This example assumes that the byte-sized integer data H'11 is originally located at the
4-byte boundary address. The assembler will insert the filler data as shown in the figure
below.
4-byteboundary

Memory

H'11
H'22
H'33
H'09
H'4444H'0009H'55555555: Codes filled in by
the assembler.

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 117 of 391

5.2.3

Symbol Handling Assembler Directives

This assembler provides the following assembler directives concerned with symbols.

.EQU
Sets a symbol value.

.ASSIGN
Sets and resets a symbol value.

.REG
Defines the alias of a register name.

.FREG
Defines a floating-point register name.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 118 of 391

.EQU
Symbol Value Setting (Resetting Not Allowed)
Syntax<symbol>[:]∆.EQU∆<symbol value>

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter the symbol to which a value is to be set.
2. Operation
Enter the .EQU mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the value to be set to the symbol.
Description
1. .EQU is the assembler directive that sets a value to a symbol.
Symbols defined with the .EQU directive cannot be redefined.
2. The symbol value must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value, an address value, or an import symbol value*and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
The values allowed for the symbol value are from H'00000000 to H'FFFFFFFF.
(From -2,147,483,648 to 4,294,967,295 in decimal.)
Note: An import value, import value + constant, or import value – constant can be specified.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 119 of 391

.EQU

Coding Example

∼
X1:

.EQU

10

; The value 10 is set to X1.

X2:

.EQU

20

; The value 20 is set to X2.

CMP/EQ#X1,R0; This is the same as CMP/EQ #10,R0.

BT

LABEL1

CMP/EQ#X2,R0BTLABEL2∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 120 of 391; This is the same as CMP/EQ #20,R0.

.ASSIGN
Symbol Value Setting (Resetting Allowed)
Syntax<symbol>[:]∆.ASSIGN∆<symbol value>

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter the symbol to which a value is to be set.
2. Operation
Enter the .ASSIGN mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the value to be set to the symbol.
Description
1. .ASSIGN is the assembler directive that sets a value to a symbol.
Symbols defined with the .ASSIGN directive can be redefined with the .ASSIGN directive.
2. The symbol value must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value or an address value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
The values allowed for the symbol value are from H'00000000 to H'FFFFFFFF. (From 0 to
4,294,967,295 in decimal.)
3. Definitions with the .ASSIGN directive are valid from the point of the definition forward in
the program.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 121 of 391

.ASSIGN

4. Symbols defined with .ASSIGN have the following limitations:— They cannot be used as export or import symbols.
— They cannot be referenced from the debugger.
Coding Example∼
X1:.ASSIGN

1

X2:.ASSIGN

2

CMP/EQ#X1,R0BTLABEL1

CMP/EQ#X2,R0BTLABEL2; This is the same as CMP/EQ #1,R0.
; This is the same as CMP/EQ #2,R0.

∼
X1:.ASSIGN

3

X2:.ASSIGN

4

CMP/EQ#X1,R0BTLABEL3

CMP/EQ#X2,R0BF

LABEL4∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 122 of 391; This is the same as CMP/EQ #3,R0.
; This is the same as CMP/EQ #4,R0.

.REG
Register Name Alias Definition
Syntax<symbol>[:]∆.REG∆<register name>or<symbol>[:]∆.REG∆(<register name>)Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter the symbol to be defined as the alias of a register name.
2. Operation
Enter the .REG mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the register name for which the alias of a register name is being defined.
Description
1. .REG is the assembler directive that defines the alias of a register name.
The alias of a register name defined with .REG can be used in exactly the same manner as theoriginal register name.
The alias of a register name defined with .REG cannot be redefined.
2. The alias of a register name can only be defined for the general registers (R0 to R15, and SP).
3. Definitions with the .REG directive are valid from the point of the definition forward in the
program.
4. Symbols defined with .REG have the following limitations:— They cannot be used as import or export symbols.
— They cannot be referenced from the simulator/debugger.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 123 of 391

.REG

Coding Example

∼
MIN:

.REG

R10

MAX:

.REG

R11

MOV

#0,MIN; This is the same as MOV #0,R10.

MOV#99,MAX; This is the same as MOV #99,R11.

CMP/HS

MIN,R1BF

LABEL

CMP/HS

R1,MAX

BF

LABEL

∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 124 of 391

.FREG
Floating-Point Register Name Alias Definition
Syntax<symbol>[:]∆.FREG∆<floating-point register name>or<symbol>[:]∆.FREG∆(<floating-point register name>)Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter the symbol to be defined as a floating-point register name.
2. Operation
Enter the .FREG mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the floating-point register name for which the alias is to be defined.
Description
1. .FREG is the assembler directive that defines the alias of a floating-point register name.
The alias of a floating-point register name defined with .FREG can be used in exactly the samemanner as the original register name.
The alias of a floating-point register name defined with .FREG cannot be redefined.
2. The alias can only be defined for the floating-point registers FRm (m = 0 to 15), DRn (n = 0, 2,
4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14), XDn (n = 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14), and FVi (i = 0, 4, 8, 12).
3. Definitions with the .FREG are valid from the point of the definition forward in the program.
4. Symbols defined with .FREG have the following limitations:— They cannot be used as import or export symbols.
— They cannot be referenced from the simulator/debugger.
5. .FREG is valid only when SH-2E, SH-3E, or SH-4 is selected as the CPU type.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 125 of 391

.FREG

Coding Example

∼
MAX:

.FREG
FMOV

FR11
@FR1,MAX; This is the same as FMOV @FR1,FR11.

FCMP/EQ

MAX,FR2; This is the same as FCMP/EQ FR11,FR2.

BF

LABEL

∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 126 of 391

5.2.4

Data and Data Area Reservation Assembler Directives

This assembler provides the following assembler directives that are concerned with data and data
area reservation.

.DATA

Reserves integer data.

.DATAB

Reserves integer data blocks.

.SDATA

Reserves character string data.

.SDATAB

Reserves character string data blocks.

.SDATAC

Reserves character string data (with length).

.SDATAZ

Reserves character string data (with zero terminator).

.FDATA

Reserves floating-point data.

.FDATAB

Reserves floating-point data block.

.XDATA

Reserves fixed-point data.

.RES

Reserves data area.

.SRES

Reserves character string data area.

.SRESC

Reserves character string data area (with length).

.SRESZ

Reserves character string data area (with zero terminator).

.FRES

Reserves floating-point data area.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 127 of 391

.DATA
Integer Data Reservation
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.DATA[.<operation size>]∆<integer data>[,<integer data>...]

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation— Mnemonic
Enter .DATA mnemonic.
— Operation size
Specifier

Data Size

B

Byte

W

Word (2 bytes)

L

Longword (4 bytes)

The shaded section indicates the default value when the specifier is omitted.

The specifier determines the size of the reserved data.
The longword size is used when the specifier is omitted.
3. Operands
Enter the values to be reserved as data in the operand field.
Description
1. .DATA is the assembler directive that reserves integer data in memory.
2. Arbitrary values, including relative values and forward reference symbols, can be used to
specify the integer data.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 128 of 391

.DATA

3. The range of values that can be specified as integer data varies with the operation size.
Operation Size

Integer Data Range*

B

H'00000000 to H'000000FF
H'FFFFFF80 to H'FFFFFFFF(0 to 255)(–128 to –1)

W

H'00000000 to H'0000FFFF
H'FFFF8000 to H'FFFFFFFF(0 to 65,535)(–32,768 to –1)

L

H'00000000 to H'7FFFFFFF
H'80000000 to H'FFFFFFFF(0 to 4,294,967,295)(–2,147,483,648 to –1)

Note: Numbers in parentheses are decimal.

Coding Example∼
X:.ALIGN4; (This statement adjusts the value of thelocation counter.).DATA.L

H'11111111;.DATA.W

H'2222,H'3333; These statements reserve integer data.

.DATA.B

H'44,H'55;∼
Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress symbol
X
11
22
44

11
22
55

11
33

4 bytes1133

Note: The data in this figure
is hexadecimal.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 129 of 391

.DATAB
Integer Data Block Reservation
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.DATAB[.<operation size>]∆<block count>,<integer data>

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation— Mnemonic
Enter .DATAB mnemonic.
— Operation size
Specifier

Data Size

B

Byte

W

Word (2 bytes)

L

Longword (4 bytes)

The shaded section indicates the default value when the specifier is omitted.

The specifier determines the size of the reserved data.
The longword size is used when the specifier is omitted.
3. Operands— First operand: block countEnter the number of times the data value is repeated as the first operand.
— Second operand: integer data
Enter the value to be reserved as the second operand.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 130 of 391

.DATAB

Description
1. .DATAB is the assembler directive that reserves the specified number of integer data items
consecutively in memory.
2. The block count must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
Arbitrary values, including relative values and forward reference symbols, can be used to
specify the integer data.
3. The range of values that can be specified as the block size and as the integer data varies withthe operation size.
Operation Size

Block Size Range*

B

H'00000001 to H'FFFFFFFF(1 to 4,294,967,295)

W

H'00000001 to H'7FFFFFFF(1 to 2,147,483,647)

L

H'00000001 to H'3FFFFFFF(1 to 1,073,741,823)

Operation Size

Integer Data Range*

B

H'00000000 to H'000000FF
H'FFFFFF80 to H'FFFFFFFF(0 to 255)(–128 to –1)

W

H'00000000 to H'0000FFFF
H'FFFF8000 to H'FFFFFFFF(0 to 65,535)(–32,768 to –1)

L

H'00000000 to H'7FFFFFFF
H'80000000 to H'FFFFFFFF(0 to 4,294,967,295)(–2,147,483,648 to –1)

Note: Numbers in parentheses are decimal.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 131 of 391

.DATAB

Coding Example∼
X:.ALIGN4; (This statement adjusts the value of the; location counter.).DATAB.L

1,H'11111111;.DATAB.W

2,H'2222; This statement reserves two blocks of integer.DATAB.B

3,H'33; data.

∼Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress symbol
X
11
22
33

11
22
33

11
22
33

11
22

Note: The data in this figure
is hexadecimal.
4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 132 of 391

.SDATA
Character String Data Reservation
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.SDATA∆"<character string>"[,"<character string>"...]

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation
Enter the .SDATA mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the character string(s) to be reserved.
Description
1. .SDATA is the assembler directive that reserves character string data in memory.
Reference: Character strings → Programmer's Guide, 1.7, "Character Strings"
2. A control character can be appended to a character string.
The syntax for this notation is as follows:"<character string>"<<ASCII code for a control character>>

The ASCII code for a control character must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,—. Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 133 of 391

.SDATA

Coding Example∼; (This statement adjusts the value of.ALIGN

4.SDATA"AAAAA"; This statement reserves character string data.

.SDATA"""BBB"""; The character string in this example includes; the location counter.)X:; double quotation marks.
.SDATA; The character string in this example has"ABAB"<H'07>∼; a control character appended.

Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress
symbol
X

41
41
42
41

41
22
22
42

41
42
41
07

41
42
42
Notes: 1. The data in this figure ishexadecimal.
2. The ASCII code for “A” is: H'41.
The ASCII code for “B” is: H'42.
The ASCII code for “" ” is: H'22.

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 134 of 391

.SDATAB
Character String Data Blocks Reservation
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.SDATAB∆<block count>,"<character string>"

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation
Enter the .SDATAB mnemonic.
3. Operands— First operand: <block count>
Enter the number of character strings as the first operand.
— Second operand: <character string>
Enter the character string to be reserved as the second operand.
Description
1. .SDATAB is the assembler directive that reserves the specified number of character strings
consecutively in memory.
Reference: Character strings → Programmer's Guide, 1.7, "Character Strings"
2. The <block count> must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
A value of 1 or larger must be specified as the block count.
The maximum value of the block count depends on the length of the character string data.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 135 of 391

.SDATAB(The length of the character string data multiplied by the block count must be less than orequal to H'FFFFFFFF (4,294,967,295) bytes.)
3. A control character can be appended to a character string.
The syntax for this notation is as follows:"<character string>"<<ASCII code for a control character>>
The ASCII code for a control character must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 136 of 391

.SDATAB

Coding Example∼; (This statement adjusts the value of the.ALIGN

4.SDATAB

2,"AAAAA"; location counter.)X:; This statement reserves two character string; data blocks.
; The character string in this example includes.SDATAB

2,"""BBB""".SDATAB

2,"ABAB"<H'07> ; The character string in this example has; double quotation marks.

∼; a control character appended.

Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress
symbol
X

41
41
41
42
42
41
07
42

41
41
41
42
42
42
41
07

41
41
22
22
42
41
42

41
41
42
22
22
42
41
Notes: 1. The data in this figure ishexadecimal.
2. The ASCII code for “A” is: H'41.
The ASCII code for “B” is: H'42.
The ASCII code for “" ” is: H'22.

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 137 of 391

.SDATAC
Character String Data Reservation (With Length)
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.SDATAC∆"<character string>"[,"<character string>"...]

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation
Enter the .SDATAC mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the character string(s) to be reserved.
Description
1. .SDATAC is the assembler directive that reserves character string data (with length) inmemory.
A character string with length is a character string with an inserted leading byte that indicatesthe length of the string.
The length indicates the size of the character string (not including the length) in bytes.
Reference: Character strings → Programmer's Guide, 1.7, "Character Strings"
2. A control character can be appended to a character string.
The syntax for this notation is as follows:"<character string>"<<ASCII code for a control character>>

The ASCII code for a control character must be specified as follows:

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 138 of 391

.SDATAC— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
Coding Example∼.ALIGN; (This statement adjusts the value of the4; location counter.)
X:.SDATAC; This statement reserves character string"AAAAA"; data (with length).
.SDATAC; The character string in this example includes"""BBB"""; double quotation marks.
.SDATAC"ABAB"<H'07>∼; The character string in this example has; a control character appended.

Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress
symbol
X

05
41
42
05
42

41
41
42
41
07

41
05
42
42

4 bytes

41
22
22
41
Notes: 1. The data in this figure ishexadecimal.
2. The ASCII code for “A” is: H'41.
The ASCII code for “B” is: H'42.
The ASCII code for “" ” is: H'22.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 139 of 391

.SDATAZ
Character String Data Reservation (With Zero Terminator)
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.SDATAZ∆"<character string>"[,"<character string>"...]

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation
Enter the .SDATAZ mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the character string(s) to be reserved.
Description
1. .SDATAZ is the assembler directive that reserves character string data (with zero terminator)
in memory.
A character string with zero terminator is a character string with an appended trailing byte
(with the value H'00) that indicates the end of the string.
Reference: Character strings → Programmer's Guide, 1.7, "Character Strings"
2. A control character can be appended to a character string.
The syntax for this notation is as follows:"<character string>"<<ASCII code for a control character>>

The ASCII code for a control character must be specified as follows:

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 140 of 391

.SDATAZ— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
Coding Example∼.ALIGN; (This statement adjusts the value of the4; location counter.)
X:.SDATAZ; This statement reserves character string"AAAAA"; data (with zero terminator).
.SDATAZ; The character string in this example"""BBB"""; includes double quotation marks.
.SDATAZ"ABAB"<H'07>∼; The character string in this example has; a control character appended.

Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress
symbol
X

41
41
42
41
07

41
00
42
42
00

41
22
22
41

4 bytes

41
42
00
42
Notes: 1. The data in this figure ishexadecimal.
2. The ASCII code for “A” is: H'41.
The ASCII code for “B” is: H'42.
The ASCII code for “" ” is: H'22.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 141 of 391

.FDATA
Floating-Point Data Reservation
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.FDATA[.operation size]∆<floating-point data>[,<floating-point data>...]

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation— Mnemonic
Enter .FDATA mnemonic.
— Operation size
Specifier

Data Size

S

Single precision (4 bytes)

D

Double precision (8 bytes)

The shaded section indicates the default value when the specifier is omitted.

The specifier determines the size of the reserved data.
Single precision is used when the specifier is omitted.
3. Operands
Enter the values to be reserved as data.
Description
1. .FDATA is the assembler directive that reserves floating-point data in memory.
Reference: Floating-point data
→ Programmer's Guide, 1.4.3, "Floating-Point Constants"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 142 of 391

.FDATA

Coding Example∼.ALIGN; (This statement adjusts the value of the4; location counter.)X:.FDATA.S; This statement reserves a 4-byte area

F'1.234S; 3F9DF3B6 (F'1.234S).
.FDATA.S; This statement reserves a 4-byte area

H'7F800000.S; 7F800000 (H'F800000.S).
.FDATA.D; This statement reserves an 8-byte area

F'4.32D-1∼; 3FDBA5E353F7CED9 (F'4.32D-1).

Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress symbol
X
3F
7F
3F
53

9D
80
DB
F7

F3
00
A5
CE

B6
00
E3
D9

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 143 of 391

.FDATAB
Floating-Point Data Block Reservation
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.FDATAB[.operation size]∆<block count>,<floating-point data>

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation— Mnemonic
Enter .FDATAB mnemonic.
— Operation size
Specifier

Data Size

S

Single precision (4 bytes)

D

Double precision (8 bytes)

The shaded section indicates the default value when the specifier is omitted.

The specifier determines the size of the reserved data.
Single precision is used when the specifier is omitted.
3. Operands— First operand: block countEnter the number of times the data value is repeated as the first operand.
— Second operand: floating-point data
Enter the floating-point data to be reserved as the second operand.
Description
1. .FDATAB is the assembler directive that reserves the specified number of floating-point data
items consecutively in memory.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 144 of 391

.FDATAB

2. The block count must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols, export symbols, and relative symbols must not appear in
specification.
3. The range of values that can be specified as the block size varies with the operation size.
Operation Size

Block Size Range*

S

H'00000001 to H'3FFFFFFF(1 to 1,073,741,823)

D

H'00000001 to H'1FFFFFFF(1 to 536,870,911)

Note: Numbers in parentheses are decimal.

Reference: Floating-point data
→ Programmer's Guide, 1.4.3, "Floating-Point Constants"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 145 of 391

.FDATAB

Coding Example∼.ALIGN; (This statement adjusts the value of the4; location counter.)X:.FDATAB.S; This statement reserves two blocks of 4-byte

2,H'7F800000.S; areas 7F800000 (H'7F800000.S).
.FDATAB.D; This statement reserves three blocks of 8-byte

3,F'4.32D-1∼; areas 3FDBA5E353F7CED9 (F'4.32D-1).

Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress symbol
X
7F
7F
3F
53
3F
53
3F
53

80
80
DB
F7
DB
F7
DB
F7

00
00
A5
CE
A5
CE
A5
CE

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 146 of 391

00
00
E3
D9
E3
D9
E3
D9

.XDATA
Fixed-Point Data Reservation
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.XDATA[.<operation size>]∆<fixed-point data>[,<fixed-point data>...]

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation— Mnemonic
Enter .XDATA mnemonic.
— Operation size
Specifier

Data SizeW

Word (2 bytes)

L

Longword (4 bytes)

The shaded section indicates the default value when the specifier is omitted.

The specifier determines the size of the reserved data.
The longword size is used when the specifier is omitted.
3. Operands
Enter the fixed-point data to be reserved as data in the operand field.
Description
1. .XDATA is the assembler directive that reserves fixed-point data in memory.
Reference: Fixed-point data
→ Programmer's Guide, 1.4.4, "Fixed-Point Constants"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 147 of 391

.XDATA

Coding Example∼.ALIGN; (This statement adjusts the value of the4; location counter.)X:.XDATA.L; This statement reserves 4-byte area

0.5

; (H'40000000).
.XDATA.W; This statement reserves 2-byte areas

0.75,0.25∼; (H'6000) and (H'2000).

Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress symbol
X
40
60

00
00

00
20

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 148 of 391

00
00

.RES
Data Area Reservation
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.RES[.<operation size>]∆<area count>

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation— Mnemonic
Enter .RES mnemonic.
— Operation size
Specifier

Data Size

B

Byte

W

Word (2 bytes)

L

Longword (4 bytes)

The shaded section indicates the default value when the specifier is omitted.

The specifier determines the size of one area.
The longword size is used when the specifier is omitted.
3. Operands
Enter the number of areas to be reserved in the operand field.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 149 of 391

.RES

Description
1. .RES is the assembler directive that reserves data areas in memory.
2. The area count must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
3. The range of values that can be specified as the area count varies with the operation size.
Operation Size

Area Count Range*

B

H'00000001 to H'FFFFFFFF(1 to 4,294,967,295)

W

H'00000001 to H'7FFFFFFF(1 to 2,147,483,647)

L

H'00000001 to H'3FFFFFFF(1 to 1,073,741,823)

Note: Numbers in parentheses are decimal.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 150 of 391

.RES

Coding Example∼; (This statement adjusts the value of the location.ALIGN

4.RES.L2; This statement reserves two longword-size areas.

.RES.W3; This statement reserves three-word-size areas.

.RES.B

5; This statement reserves five-byte-size areas.

; counter.)X:∼
Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress symbol
X,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 151 of 391

.SRES
Character String Data Area Reservation
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.SRES∆<character string area size>[,<character string area size>...]

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation
Enter the .SRES mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the sizes of the areas to be reserved in byte units.
Description
1. .SRES is the assembler directive that reserves character string data areas.
2. The character string area size must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
The values that are allowed for the character string area size are from H'00000001 to
H'FFFFFFFF (from 1 to 4,294,967,295 in decimal).

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 152 of 391

.SRES

Coding Example∼; (This statement adjusts the value of the location.ALIGN

4

.SRES

7

; This statement reserves a 7-byte area.

.SRES

6

; This statement reserves a 6-byte area.

; counter.)X:∼
Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress symbol
X,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 153 of 391

.SRESC
Character String Data Area Reservation (With Length)
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.SRESC∆<character string area size>[,<character string area size>...]

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation
Enter the .SRESC mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the sizes of the areas (not including the length) to be reserved in byte units.
Description
1. .SRESC is the assembler directive that reserves character string data areas (with length) inmemory.
A character string with length is a character string with an inserted leading byte that indicatesthe length of the string.
The length indicates the size of the character string (not including the length) in bytes.
Reference: Character strings → Programmer's Guide, 1.7, "Character Strings"
2. The character string area size must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
The values that are allowed for the character string area size are from H'00000000 to
H'000000FF (from 0 to 255 in decimal).

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 154 of 391

.SRESC

3. The size of the area reserved in memory is the size of the character string area itself plus 1 byte
for the count.
Coding Example∼.ALIGN

4.SRESC7; (This statement adjusts the value of the location; counter.)X:; This statement reserves 7 bytes plus 1 byte for; the count.

.SRESC∼

6; This statement reserves 6 bytes plus 1 byte for; the count.

Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress symbol
X,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 155 of 391

.SRESZ
Character String Data Area Reservation (With Zero Terminator)
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.SRESZ∆<character string area size>[,<character string area size>...]

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation
Enter the .SRESZ mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the sizes of the areas (not including the terminating zero) to be reserved in byte units.
Description
1. .SRESZ is the assembler directive that allocates character string data areas (with zerotermination).
A character string with length is a character string with an appended trailing byte (with thevalue H'00) that indicates the end of the string.
Reference: Character strings → Programmer's Guide, 1.7, "Character Strings"
2. The character string area size must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
The values that are allowed for the character string area size are from H'00000000 to
H'000000FF (from 0 to 255 in decimal).

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 156 of 391

.SRESZ

3. The size of the area reserved in memory is the size of the character string area itself plus 1 byte
for the terminating zero.
Coding Example∼
X:.ALIGN4; (This statement adjusts the value of the location counter.).SRESZ

7; This statement reserves 7 bytes plus 1 byte for; the terminating byte.

.SRESZ∼

6; This statement reserves 6 bytes plus 1 byte for; the terminating byte.

Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress symbol
X,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 157 of 391

.FRES
Floating-Point Data Area Reservation
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆.FRES[S]∆<area count>

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation— Mnemonic
Enter .FRES mnemonic.
— Operation size
Specifier

Data Size

S

Single precision (4 bytes)

D

Double precision (8 bytes)

The shaded section indicates the default value when the specifier is omitted.

The specifier determines the size of one area.
Single precision is used when the specifier is omitted.
3. Operands
Enter the number of areas (the number of single-precision data items).
Description
1. .FRES is the assembler directive that reserves floating-point data areas in memory.
2. The area count must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols, import symbols, and relative symbols must not appear in thespecification.
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 158 of 391

.FRES

Coding Example∼; (This statement adjusts the value of the location.ALIGN

4.FRES.S2; This statement reserves two areas.

.FRES.D3; This statement reserves three areas.

; counter.)X:∼
Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress symbolX

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 159 of 391

5.2.5

Export and Import Assembler Directives

This assembler provides the following assembler directives concerned with export and import.

.EXPORT
Declares export symbols.
This declaration allows symbols defined in the current file to be referenced in other files.

.IMPORT
Declares import symbols.
This declaration allows symbols defined in other files to be referenced in the current file.

.GLOBAL
Declares export and import symbols.
This declaration allows symbols defined in the current file to be referenced in other files, andallows symbols defined in other files to be referenced in the current file.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 160 of 391

.EXPORT
Export Symbols Declaration
Syntax∆.EXPORT∆<symbol>[,<symbol>...]

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .EXPORT mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the symbols to be declared as export symbols.
Description
1. .EXPORT is the assembler directive that declares export symbols.
An export symbol declaration is required to reference symbols defined in the current file fromother files.
2. The following can be declared to be export symbols.
— Constant symbols (other than those defined with the .ASSIGN directive)— Absolute address symbols (other than address symbols in a dummy section)— Relative address symbols
3. To reference a symbol as an import symbol, it is necessary to declare it to be an export symbol,
and also to declare it to be an import symbol.
Import symbols are declared in the file in which they are referenced using either the .IMPORTor the .GLOBAL directive.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 161 of 391

.EXPORT

Coding Example(In this example, a symbol defined in file A is referenced from file B.)
File A:.EXPORT

X

∼
X:

.EQU

; This statement declares X to be an export; symbol.

H'10000000; This statement defines X.

X; This statement declares X to be an import∼
File B:.IMPORT∼; symbol.

.ALIGN

4.DATA.L

X∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 162 of 391; This statement references X.

.IMPORT
Import Symbols Declaration
Syntax∆.IMPORT∆<symbol>[,<symbol>...]

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .IMPORT mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the symbols to be declared as import symbols.
Description
1. .IMPORT is the assembler directive that declares import symbols.
An import symbol declaration is required to reference symbols defined in another file.
2. Symbols defined in the current file cannot be declared to be import symbols.
3. To reference a symbol as an import symbol, it is necessary to declare it to be an export symbol,
and also to declare it to be an import symbol.
Export symbols are declared in the file in which they are defined using either the .EXPORT or
the .GLOBAL directive.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 163 of 391

.IMPORT

Coding Example(In this example, a symbol defined in file A is referenced from file B.)
File A:.EXPORT

X

∼
X:

.EQU

; This statement declares X to be an export; symbol.

H'10000000; This statement defines X.

X; This statement declares X to be an import∼
File B:.IMPORT∼; symbol.

.ALIGN

4.DATA.L

X∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 164 of 391; This statement references X.

.GLOBAL
Export and Import Symbols Declaration
Syntax∆.GLOBAL∆<symbol>[,<symbol>...]

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .GLOBAL mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the symbols to be declared as export symbols or as import symbols.
Description
1. .GLOBAL is the assembler directive that declares symbols to be either export symbols or
import symbols.
An export symbol declaration is required to reference symbols defined in the current file fromother files. An import symbol declaration is required to reference symbols defined in anotherfile.
2. A symbol defined within the current file is declared to be an export symbol by a .GLOBAL
declaration.
A symbol that is not defined within the current file is declared to be an import symbol by a
.GLOBAL declaration.
3. The following can be declared to be export symbols.
— Constant symbols (other than those defined with the .ASSIGN assembler directive)— Absolute address symbols (other than address symbols in a dummy section)— Relative address symbols

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 165 of 391

.GLOBAL

4. To reference a symbol as an import symbol, it is necessary to declare it to be an export symbol,
and also to declare it to be an import symbol.
Export symbols are declared in the file in which they are defined using either the .EXPORT or
the .GLOBAL directive.
Import symbols are declared in the file in which they are referenced using either the .IMPORTor the .GLOBAL directive.
Coding Example(In this example, a symbol defined in file A is referenced from file B.)
File A:.GLOBAL

X∼
X:; This statement declares X to be an export; symbol.

.EQU

H'10000000; This statement defines X.

∼
File B:.GLOBAL; This statement declares X to be an importX∼; symbol.

.ALIGN

4.DATA.L

X∼
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 166 of 391; This statement references X.

5.2.6

Object Module Assembler Directives

This assembler provides the following assembler directives concerned with object modules.

.OUTPUT
Controls object module and debug information output.

.DEBUG
Controls the output of symbolic debug information.

.ENDIAN
Selects big endian or little endian.

.LINE
Changes line number.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 167 of 391

.OUTPUT
Object Module Output Control
Syntax∆.OUTPUT∆<output specifier>[,<output specifier>]

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .OUTPUT mnemonic.
3. Operands: <output specifier>Output Specifier

Output Control

OBJ

An object module is output.

NOOBJ

No object module is output.

DBG

Debug information is output in the object module.

NODBG

No debug information is output in the object module.

The shaded section indicates the default value when the specifier is omitted.

The output specifiers control object module and debug information output.
Description
1. .OUTPUT is the assembler directive that controls object module and debug information
output.
2. If the .OUTPUT directive is used two or more times in a program with inconsistent output
specifiers, an error occurs.
Example:∼∼.OUTPUTOBJ.OUTPUTNODBG∼Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 168 of 391← OK.OUTPUTOBJ.OUTPUTNOOBJ∼← Error

.OUTPUT

3. Specifications concerning debug information output are only valid when an object module isoutput.
4. To output debug information, the assembler automatically generates a directory with the name"dwfinf" under the directory to which the object file is output, and outputs a supplement
debugging information file (ELF/DWARF supplement information) whose file name is thesame as the object file and whose file format is "dwi".
5. The assembler gives priority to command line option specifications concerning object moduleand debug information output.
References: Object module output→ User's Guide, 2.2.2, "Object Module Command Line Options" –OBJECT–NOOBJECT
Debug information output→ User's Guide, 2.2.2, "Object Module Command Line Options" –DEBUG–NODEBUG
Coding Example
Note: This example and its description assume that no command line options concerning object
module or debug information output were specified.

.OUTPUTOBJ∼; An object module is output.
; No debug information is output.

--------------------------------------------------------------------.OUTPUT

OBJ,DBG∼; Both an object module and debug information; is output.

--------------------------------------------------------------------.OUTPUT∼

OBJ,NODBG; An object module is output.
; No debug information is output.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 169 of 391

.OUTPUT

Supplement:
Debug information is required when debugging a program using the debugger, and is part of theobject module.
Debug information includes information about source statements and information about symbols.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 170 of 391

.DEBUG
Symbolic Debug Information Output Control
Syntax∆.DEBUG∆<output specifier>Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .DEBUG mnemonic.
3. Operands: output specifier
Output Specifier

Output Control

ON

Symbolic debug information is output starting with the next source
statement.

OFF

Symbolic debug information is not output starting with the next
source statement.

The shaded section indicates the default value when the specifier is omitted.

The output specifier controls symbolic debug information output.
Description
1. .DEBUG is the assembler directive that controls the output of symbolic debug information.
This directive allows assembly time to be reduced by restricting the output of symbolic debug
information to only those symbols required in debugging.
2. The specification of the .DEBUG directive is only valid when both an object module anddebug information are output.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 171 of 391

.DEBUG

References: Object module output→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.6, "Object Module Assembler Directives",.OUTPUT→ User's Guide, 2.2.2 "Object Module Command Line Options"–OBJECT –NOOBJECT
Debug information output→ Programmer's Guide 5.2.6, "Object Module Assembler Directives",.OUTPUT→ User's Guide, 2.2.2, "Object Module Command Line Options"–DEBUG –NODEBUG
Coding Example∼.DEBUGOFF∼.DEBUG; Starting with the next statement, the assembler; does not output symbolic debug information.

ON∼; Starting with the next statement, the assembler; outputs symbolic debug information.

Supplement:
The term "symbolic debug information" refers to the parts of debug information concerned withsymbols.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 172 of 391

.ENDIAN
Endian Selection
Syntax∆.ENDIAN∆<endian><endian>:{BIG|LITTLE}

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .ENDIAN mnemonic.
3. Operands: endian
EndianOutput Control

BIG

Assembles program in big endian

LITTLE

Assembles program in little endianThe shaded section indicates the default value when the specifier is omitted.

Description
1. .ENDIAN is the assembler directive that selects the big endian or little endian.
2. Enter an .ENDIAN directive at the beginning of the source program.
3. If the –ENDIAN option has been specified, the .ENDIAN is invalidated.
Reference:–ENDIAN→ User's Guide, 2.2.2 "Object Module Command Line Options" –ENDIAN

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 173 of 391

.ENDIAN

Coding Example
1. When the big endian is selected

.CPU

SH1

; This statement specifies the SH1 as the CPU.

.ENDIANBIG; This statement selects the big endian.

;

∼
X:

.DATA.L

H'12345678

X:.DATA.W

H'1234,H'5678; These statements reserve integer data.

X:.DATA.B

H'12,H'34;∼
Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress symbol
X
12
12
12

34
34
34

56
56

4 bytesRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 174 of 391

78
78

Note: The data in this figure
is hexadecimal.

.ENDIAN

2. When the little endian is selected

.CPU

SH3

; This statement specifies the SH3 as the CPU.

.ENDIANLITTLE; This statement selects the little endian.

∼X:.DATA.L

H'12345678;

X:.DATA.W

H'1234,H'5678; These statements reserve integer data.

X:.DATA.B

H'12,H'34;∼
Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
MemoryAddress symbol
X
78
34
12

56
12
34

34
78

4 bytes

1256

Note: The data in this figure
is hexadecimal.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 175 of 391

.LINELine Number Modification
Syntax∆.LINE∆["<file name>",]<line number>Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .LINE mnemonic.
3. Operands— First operand: file nameEnter the file name referred to at error message output or at debugging.
— Second operand: line numberEnter the line number referred to at error message output or at debugging.
Description
1. .LINE is the assembler directive that changes the file name and line number referred to at error
message output or at debugging.
2. The line number and the file name specified with a .LINE directive is valid until the next.LINE.
3. In a C Compiler of version 3.0 or higher, the .LINE directive that corresponds to the line
number in the C source file is generated when the debug option is specified and an assembler
source is output.
4. If the file name is omitted, the file name is not changed, but only the line number is changed.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 176 of 391

.LINE

Coding Example
shc–code=asmcode -debug test.c
C source program (test.c)int{

Assembly source program (test.src)

func()
int.EXPORT.SECTION
.LINE

i,j;
_func:

j=0;
for (i=1;i<=10;i++){j+=i;}return(j);

→

.LINE
MOV
.LINE
MOV
MOV

}

_func
P,CODE,ALIGN=4"/asm/test.c",1; function: func
; frame size=0"/asm/test.c",5#0,R5"/asm/test.c",6#10,R6
#1,R4

L212:
.LINE
ADD
ADD
.LINE
CMP/GT
BF
.LINE
RTS
.LINE
MOV
.END

"/asm/test.c",7
R4,R5
#1,R4
"/asm/test.c",6
R6,R4
L212
"/asm/test.c",10"/asm/test.c",9R5,R0

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 177 of 391

5.2.7

Assemble Listing Assembler Directives

This assembler provides the following assembler directives for controlling the assemble listing.

.PRINT

Controls assemble listing output.

.LIST

Controls the output of the source program listing.

.FORM

Sets the number of lines and columns in the assemble listing.

.HEADING

Sets the header for the source program listing.

.PAGE

Inserts a new page in the source program listing.

.SPACE

Outputs blank lines to the source program listing.

Supplement:
The assemble listing is a listing to which the results of the assembly are output, and includes asource program listing, a cross-reference listing, and a section information listing.
Reference:

For a detailed description of the assemble listing, see appendix C, "Assemble Listing
Output Example".

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 178 of 391

.PRINT
Assemble Listing Output Control
Syntax∆.PRINT∆<output specifier>[,<output specifier>...]

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .PRINT mnemonic.
3. Operands: output specifier
Output Specifier

Assembler Action

LIST

An assemble listing is output.

NOLISTNo assemble listing is output.

SRC

A source program listing is output in the assemble listing.

NOSRC

No source program listing is output in the assemble listing.

CREF

A cross-reference listing is output in the assemble listing.

NOCREFNo cross-reference listing is output in the assemble listing.

SCT

A section information listing is output in the assemble listing.

NOSCTNo section information listing is output in the assemble listing.

The shaded sections indicate the default settings when the specifier is omitted.

The output specifier controls assemble listing output.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 179 of 391

.PRINT

Description
1. .PRINT is the assembler directive that controls assemble listing output.
2. If the .PRINT directive is used two or more times in a program with inconsistent output
specifiers, an error occurs.
Example:∼∼.PRINT

LIST.PRINT

NOSRC

∼

← OK

.PRINT

LIST.PRINTNOLIST∼← Error3. The output specifiers concerned with the source program listing, the cross-reference listing,and the section information listing are only valid when an assemble listing is output.
4. The assembler gives priority to command line option specifications concerning assemble
listing output.
References: Assemble listing output→ User's Guide, 2.2.3, "Assemble Listing Command Line Options"–LIST –NOLIST–SOURCE –NOSOURCE–CROSS_REFERENCE –NOCROSS_REFERENCE–SECTION –NOSECTION
Coding Example
Note: This example and its description assume that no command line options concerning
assemble listing output are specified.
.PRINT∼

LIST; All types of assemble listing are output.

--------------------------------------------------------------------.PRINT
LIST,NOSRC,NOCREF; Only a section information listing is output.

∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 180 of 391

.LIST
Source Program Listing Output Control
Syntax∆.LIST∆<output specifier>[,<output specifier>...]
Output specifier: {ON|OFF|COND|NOCOND|DEF|NODEF|CALL|NOCALL|
EXP|NOEXP|CODE|NOCODE}

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .LIST mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the output specifiers.
Description
1. .LIST is the assembler directive that controls output of the source program listing in thefollowing three ways:aSelects whether or not to output source statements.

b Selects whether or not to output source statements related to the conditional assembly andmacro functions.
cSelects whether or not to output object code lines.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 181 of 391

.LIST

2. Output is controlled by output specifiers as follows:
Output Specifier
Type Output Not output

ObjectaON

OFF

Source statements The source statements following this directive

b

COND

NOCOND

Failed condition

Condition-failed .AIF or .AIFDEF directive
statements

DEF

NODEF

Definition

Macro definition statements.AREPEAT and .AWHILE definition statements.INCLUDE directive statements.ASSIGNA and .ASSSIGNC directive
statements

CALL

NOCALLCall

Macro call statements,.AIF, AIFDEF, and .AENDI directive statements

EXP

NOEXP

Expansion

Macro expansion statements.AREPEAT and .AWHILE expansion statements

CODE

NOCODE

Object code lines

The object code lines exceeding the source
statement linesc

Description

The shaded sections indicate the default settings when the specifier is omitted.

3. The specification of the .LIST directive is only valid when an assemble listing is output.
References: Source program listing output→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.7, "Assemble Listing Assembler Directives",.PRINT→ User's Guide, 2.2.3, "Assemble Listing Command Line Options",–LIST –NOLIST –SOURCE –NOSOURCE
4. The assembler gives priority to command line option specifications concerning source program
listing output.
Reference:

Output on the source program listing→ User's Guide, 2.2.3, "Assemble Listing Command Line Options"–SHOW –NOSHOW

5. .LIST directive statements themselves are not output on the source program listing.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 182 of 391

.LIST

Coding Example.LIST.MACRO
SHIFT

SHIFT

SHIFT

SHIFT

SHIFT

NOCOND,NODEF
SHLRNCOUNT,Rd

This statement controls source program
listing output.

.ASSIGNA \COUNT.AIF \&SHIFT GE 16
SHLR16 \Rd.ASSIGNA \&SHIFT-16.AENDI.AIF \&SHIFT GE 8
SHLR8
\Rd
.ASSIGNA \&SHIFT-8.AENDI.AIF \&SHIFT GE 4
SHLR2
\Rd
SHLR2
\Rd
.ASSIGNA \&SHIFT-4.AENDI

These statements define a generalpurpose multiple-bit shift procedure as a
macro instruction.

.AIF \&SHIFT GE 2
SHLR2
\Rd
.ASSIGNA \&SHIFT-2.AENDI.AIF \&SHIFT GE 1
SHLR\Rd
.AENDI
.ENDM
SHLRN

23,R0

Macro callRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 183 of 6

.LIST

Source Listing Output of Coding Example
The .LIST directive suppresses the output of the macro definition, .ASSIGNA and .ASSIGNC
directive statements, and .AIF and .AIFDEF condition-failed statements.

31

31

32

32

SHLRN

23,R0

33

M

35

M

36

M

.AIF 23GE 16

37 00000000 4029

C

SHLR16

R0

39

M.AENDI

40

M

41

M

45

M

46

.AIF 7

GE 8

M.AIF 7GE 4

47 00000002 4009

C

SHLR2

R0

48 00000004 4009

C

SHLR2

R0

50

M

.AENDI

51

M

52

M

.AIF 3GE 2

53 00000006 4009

C

SHLR2

R0

55

M

.AENDI

56

M

57

M

.AIF 1

GE 1

58 00000008 4001

C

SHLR

R0

59

M

.AENDI

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 184 of 391

.FORM
Assemble Listing Line Count and Column Count Setting
Syntax∆.FORM∆<size specifier>[,<size specifier>...]

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .FORM mnemonic.
3. Operands: size specifier
Size Specifier

Listing Size

LIN=<line count>

The specified value is set to the number of lines per page.

COL=<column count>

The specified value is set to the number of columns per line.

These specifications determine the number of lines and columns in the assemble listing.
Description
1. .FORM is the assembler directive that sets the number of lines per page and columns per linein the assemble listing.
2. The line count and column count must be specified as follows:— The specifications must be absolute values,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specifications.
The values allowed for the line count are from 20 to 255.
The values allowed for the column count are from 79 to 255.
3. The .FORM directive can be used any number of times in a given source program.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 185 of 391

.FORM

4. The assembler gives priority to command line option specifications concerning the number oflines and columns in the assemble listing.
References: Setting the line count in assemble listing→ User's Guide, 2.2.3, "Assemble Listing Command Line Options" –LINES
Setting the column count in assemble listing→ User's Guide, 2.2.3, "Assemble Listing Command Line Options"–COLUMNS
5. When there is no specification of command line option or .FORM assembler directive
specification for the line count or the column count, the following values are used:— Line count:

60 lines— Column count: 132 columns
Coding Example
Note: This example and its description assume that no command line options concerning theassemble listing line count and/or column count are specified.

∼
.FORM

LIN=60, COL=200; Starting with this page, the number of lines; per page in the assemble listing is 60 lines.
; Also, starting with this line, the number of; columns per line in the assemble listing is

∼
.FORM

; 200 columns.

LIN=55, COL=150; Starting with this page, the number of lines; per page in the assemble listing is 55 lines.
; Also, starting with this line, the number of; columns per line in the assemble listing is∼
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 186 of 391; 150 columns.

.HEADING
Source Program Listing Header Setting
Syntax∆.HEADING∆"<character string>"

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .HEADING mnemonic.
3. Operands: character string
Enter the header for the source program listing.
Description
1. .HEADING is the assembler directive that sets the header for the source program listing.
A character string of up to 60 characters can be specified as the header.
Reference:

Character strings→ Programmer's Guide, 1.7, "Character Strings"

2. The .HEADING directive can be used any number of times in a given source program.
The range of validity for a given use of the .HEADING directive is as follows:— When the .HEADING directive is on the first line of a page, it is valid starting with thatpage.
— When the .HEADING directive appears on the second or later line of a page, it is valid
starting with the next page.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 187 of 391

.HEADING

Coding Example∼.HEADING"""SAMPLE.SRC""WRITTEN BY YAMADA"∼
Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
Source program listing

Page boundary
Second line
Header"SAMPLE.SRC" WRITTEN BY YAMADA

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 188 of 391

.PAGE
Source Program Listing New Page Insertion
Syntax∆.PAGE

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .PAGE mnemonic.
3. Operands
The operand field is not used.
Description
1. .PAGE is the assembler directive that inserts a new page in the source program listing at anarbitrary point.
2. The .PAGE directive is ignored if it is used on the first line of a page.
3. .PAGE directive statements themselves are not output to the source program listing.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 189 of 391

.PAGE

Coding Example

∼
MOV

R0,R1

RTS
MOV

R0,R2

.PAGE

; A new page is specified here since the section changes at this point.

.SECTION

DT,DATA,ALIGN=4.DATA.L

H'11111111.DATA.L

H'22222222.DATA.L

H'33333333∼
Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
Source program listing
18
19
20

00000022
00000024
00000026

6103
000B
6203

18
19
20

MOV
RTS
MOV

R0,R1
R0,R2

----------------------------------------------------------------------------*** SuperH RISC engine ASSEMBLER Ver. 4.0 ***PROGRAM NAME =
22
23
24
25

00000000
00000000
00000004
00000008

11111111
22222222
33333333

22
23
24
25

01/12/98 10:23:30.SECTION.DATA.L.DATA.L.DATA.L

DT,DATA,ALIGN
H'11111111
H'22222222
H'33333333

Note: See appendix C, “Assemble Listing Output Example”, for an explanation of the contents of thesource program listing.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 190 of 391

New
page

.SPACE
Source Program Listing Blank Line Output
Syntax∆.SPACE[∆<line count>]

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .SPACE mnemonic.
3. Operands: line countEnter the number of blank lines.
A single blank line is output if this operand is omitted.
Description
1. .SPACE is the assembler directive that outputs the specified number of blank lines to thesource program listing. Nothing is output for the lines output by the .SPACE directive; inparticular line numbers are not output for these lines.
2. The line count must be specified as follows:— The specification must be an absolute value,and,— Forward reference symbols must not appear in the specification.
Values from 1 to 50 can be specified as the line count.
3. When a new page occurs as the result of blank lines output by the .SPACE directive, any
remaining blank lines are not output on the new page.
4. .SPACE directive statements themselves are not output to the source program listing.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 191 of 391

.SPACE

Coding Example.SECTION

DT1,DATA,ALIGN=4.DATA.L

H'11111111.DATA.L

H'22222222.DATA.L

H'33333333.DATA.L

H'44444444.SPACE; Inserts five blank lines at the point; where the section changes.

5.SECTION

DT2,DATA,ALIGN=4∼
Explanatory Figure for the Coding Example
Source program listing*** SuperH RISC engine ASSEMBLER Ver. 4.0 ***PROGRAM NAME =
1
2
3
4
5

00000000
00000000
00000004
00000008
0000000C

700000000

11111111
22222222
33333333
44444444

01/12/98 10:23:30

1
2
3
4
5

.SECTION.DATA.L.DATA.L.DATA.L.DATA.L

DT1,DATA,ALIGN=4
H'11111111
H'22222222
H'33333333
H'44444444

7.SECTION

DT2,DATA,ALIGN=4~
Note: See appendix C, ÒAssemble Listing Output ExampleÓ, for an explanation of the contents of the source
program listing.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 192 of 391

5.2.8Other Assembler Directives

This assembler provides the following additional assembler directives.

.PROGRAM
Sets the name of the object module.

.RADIX
Sets the radix in which integer constants with no radix specifier are interpreted.

.END
Declares the end of the source program.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 193 of 391

.PROGRAM
Object Module Name Setting
Syntax∆.PROGRAM∆<object module name>

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .PROGRAM mnemonic.
3. Operands: <object module name>Enter a name that identifies the object module.
Description
1. .PROGRAM is the assembler directive that sets the object module name.
The object module name is a name that is required by the H Series Linkage Editor or the H
Series Librarian to identify the object module.
2. Object module naming conventions are the same as symbol naming conventions.
The assembler distinguishes upper-case and lower-case letter in object module names.
Reference:

Coding of symbols→ Programmer's Guide, 1.3.2, "Coding of Symbols"

3. Setting the object module name with the .PROGRAM directive is valid only once in a given
program. (The assembler ignores the second and later specifications of the .PROGRAM
directive.)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 194 of 391

.PROGRAM

4. If there is no .PROGRAM specification of the object module name, the assembler will set a
default (implicit) object module name.
The default object module name is the file name of the object file (the object module output
destination).

·

obj

=

Object file name ............ PROG=

Example:File name File format↓
Object module name ..... PROG

Reference:

User's Guide, 1.2, "File Specification Format"

5. The object module name can be the same as a symbol used in the program.
Coding Example.PROGRAM∼

PROG1; This statement sets the object module name to be; PROG1.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 195 of 391

.RADIX
Default Integer Constant Radix Setting
Syntax∆.RADIX∆<radix specifier>Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .RADIX mnemonic.
3. Operands: radix specifier
Radix Specifier

Radix of Integer Constants with No Radix Specification

B

Binary

Q

Octal

D

DecimalH

Hexadecimal

The shaded section indicates the default setting when the specifier is omitted.

This specifier sets the radix (base) for integer constants with no radix specification.
Description
1. .RADIX is the assembler directive that sets the radix (base) for integer constants with no radix
specification.
2. When there is no radix specification with the .RADIX directive in a program, integer constants
with no radix specification are interpreted as decimal constants.
3. If hexadecimal (radix specifier H) is specified as the radix for integer constants with no radix
specification, integer constants whose first digit is A through F must be prefixed with a 0(zero). (The assembler interprets expressions that begin with A through F to be symbols.)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 196 of 391

.RADIX

4. Specifications with the .RADIX directive are valid from the point of specification forward in
the program.
Coding Example∼
X:.RADIX

D

.EQU

100

; This 100 is decimal.

∼
Y:.RADIX

H

.EQU

64

; This 64 is hexadecimal.

∼∼
Z:.RADIX

H

.EQU

0F

; A zero is prefixed to this constant "0F" since it would; be interpreted as a symbol if it were written as simply∼; "F".

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 197 of 391

.END
Source Program End Declaration
Syntax∆.END[∆<start address>]Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .END mnemonic.
3. Operands: start addressEnter the start address for simulation if required.
Description
1. .END is the assembler directive that declares the end of the source program.
Assembly processing terminates at the point that the .END directive appears.
2. If a start address is specified with the .END directive in the operand field, thesimulator/debugger starts simulation from that address.
3. The start address must be specified with either an absolute value or an address value.
4. The value of the start address must be an address in a code section.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 198 of 391

.END

Coding Example

START:.EXPORTSTART.SECTION

CD,CODE,ALIGN=4

∼
.END

START

; This statement declares the end of the source; program.

; The simulator/debugger starts simulation from the address indicated by the value of the; symbol START.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 199 of 391

Section 6 File Inclusion Function
The file inclusion function allows source files to be inserted into other source files at assembly
time. The file inserted into another file is called an included file.
This assembler provides the .INCLUDE directive to perform file inclusion. The file specified withthe .INCLUDE directive is inserted at the location of the .INCLUDE directive.
Example:Source program.INCLUDE

Included file FILE.H"FILE.H".SECTION CD1,CODE,ALIGN=4

ON:

.EQU

1

MOV #ON,R0

OFF: .EQU0~↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓File included result (source list).INCLUDE
ON:

.EQU

1

OFF: .EQU

0"FILE.H".SECTION CD1,CODE,ALIGN=4
MOV #ON,R0~

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 201 of 391

.INCLUDE
File Inclusion
Syntax∆.INCLUDE∆"<file name>"Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .INCLUDE mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the file to be included.
Description
1. .INCLUDE is the file inclusion assembler directive.
2. If no file format is specified, only the file name is used as specified (the assembler does notassume any default file format).
Reference: User's Guide, 1.2, "File Specification Format"
3. The file name can include the directory. The directory can be specified either by the absolute
path (path from the route directory) or by the relative path (path from the current directory).
Note: The current directory for the .INCLUDE directive in a source file is the directory
where the assembler is initiated. The current directory for the .INCLUDE directive in
an included file is the directory where the included file exits.
4. Included files can include other files. The nesting depth for file inclusion is limited to 30 levels(multiplex state).
5. The directory name specified by .INCLUDE can be changed by –INCLUDE.
Reference:–INCLUDE→ User's Guide, 2.2.4, "File Inclusion Function Command Line Option"Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 202 of 391

.INCLUDE

Coding Example
This example assumes the following directory configuration and operations:/• Starts the assembler from theroute directory (/)• Inputs source file /dir1/file1.src

dir1

dir2

• Inserts file2.h in file1.src• Inserts file3.h in file2.h

file1.src

file2.hfile3.hThe start command is as follows:%asmsh /dir1/file1.src (RET)

file1.src must have the following inclusion directive:.INCLUDE "dir2/file2.h"; / is the current directory (relative path specification).

or.INCLUDE "/dir2/file2.h" ; Absolute path specification

file2.h must have the following inclusion directive:.INCLUDE "file3.h"; /dir2 is the current directory (relative path
specification).

or.INCLUDE "/dir2/file3.h" ; Absolute path specificationRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 203 of 391

.INCLUDE

CAUTION!
When using Windows®95 or Windows®NT, change the slash (/) in the above example as follows
depending on the environment.
• Japanese environment: Yen mark (¥)• English environment: Backslash (\)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 204 of 391

Section 7 Conditional Assembly Function
7.1

Overview of the Conditional Assembly Function

The conditional assembly function provides the following assembly operations:• Replaces a character string in the source program with another character string.
• Selects whether or not to assemble a specified part of a source program according to thespecified condition.
• Iteratively assembles a specified part of a source program.
7.1.1

Preprocessor variables

Preprocessor variables are used to write assembly conditions. Preprocessor variables are of either
integer or character type.
1. Integer preprocessor variables
Integer preprocessor variables are defined by the .ASSIGNA directive (these variables can be
redefined).
When referencing integer preprocessor variables, insert a backslash (\)* and an ampersand (&)
in front of them.
Example:FLAG:∼.ASSIGNA 1.AIF \&FLAG EQ 1

; MOV R0,R1 is assembled

MOV R0,R1; when FLAG is 1.

∼.AENDI

Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 205 of 391

2. Character preprocessor variables
Character preprocessor variables are defined by the .ASSIGNC directive (these variables canbe redefined).
When referencing character preprocessor variables, insert a backslash (\)* and an ampersand(&) in front of them.
Example:FLAG:∼.ASSIGNC "ON".AIF "\&FLAG" EQ "ON"; MOV R0,R1 is assembled

MOV R0,R1; when FLAG is "ON".

∼.AENDI

Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.
7.1.2

Replacement Symbols

The .DEFINE directive specifies symbols that will be replaced with the corresponding character
strings at assembly. A coding example is shown below.
Example:
SYM1:

∼
∼

.DEFINE

"R1"

MOV.L

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 206 of 391

SYM1,R0; Replaced with MOV.L R1,R0.

7.1.3

Conditional Assembly

The conditional assembly function determines whether or not to assemble a specified part of asource program according to the specified conditions. Conditional assembly is classified into two
types: conditional assembly with comparison using relational operators and conditional assemblywith definition of replacement symbols.
Conditional Assembly with Comparison:
Selects the part of program to be assembled according to whether or not the specified condition issatisfied. A coding example is as follows:~.AIF<comparison condition 1><Statements to be assembled when condition 1 is satisfied>.AELIF<comparison condition 2><Statements to be assembled when condition 2 is satisfied>.AELSE<Statements to be assembled when both conditions are not satisfied>.AENDI~

Example:This part can be omitted.

∼.AIF"\&FLAG" EQ "ON"MOV

R0,R10; Assembled when FLAG

MOV

R1,R11; is ON.

MOV

R2,R12;.AELSEMOV

R10,R0; Assembled when FLAG

MOV

R11,R1; is not ON.

MOV

R12,R2;∼.AENDI

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 207 of 391

Conditional Assembly with Definition:
Selects the part of program to be assembled by whether or not the specified replacement symbol
has been defined. A coding example is as follows:~.AIFDEF<definition condition><Statements to be assembled when the specified replacement symbol is defined>.AELSE<Statements to be assembled when the specified replacement symbol is not defined>.AENDI~

Example:This part can be omitted.

∼.AIFDEFFLAG

MOV

R0,R10; Assembled when FLAG is defined with

MOV

R1,R11; the .DEFINE directive before the .AIFDEF

MOV

R2,R12; directive in the program.

MOV

R10,R0; Assembled when FLAG is not defined with

MOV

R11,R1; the .DEFINE directive before the .AIFDEF

MOV

R12,R2; directive in the program.

.AELSE∼.AENDI

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 208 of 391

7.1.4Iterated Expansion

A part of a source program can be iteratively assembled the specified number of times. A coding
example is shown below.

∼.AREPEAT <count><Statements to be iterated>∼.AENDR

Example:; This example is a division of 64-bit data by 32-bit data.
; R1:R2 (64 bits) ˜ R0 (32 bits) = R2 (32 bits): Unsigned
TST

R0,R0

BT

zero_div

CMP/HS

R0,R1

BT

over_div; Zero divisor check; Overflow check; Flag initialization

DIV0U.AREPEAT 32
ROTCL

R2

; These statements are iteratively assembled 32 times.

DIV1

R0,R1

;

R2

; R2 = quotient.AENDR
ROTCL

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 209 of 391

7.1.5

Conditional Iterated Expansion

A part of a source program can be iteratively assembled while the specified condition is satisfied.
A coding example is shown below.

∼.AWHILE <condition><Statements to be iterated>∼.AENDW

Example:; This example is a multiply and accumulate; operation.
50; TblSiz: Data table size

MOV

A_Tbl1,R1; R1: Start address of data table 1

MOV

A_Tbl2,R2; R2: Start address of data table 2

TblSiz: .ASSIGNA; MAC register initialization

CLRMAC.AWHILE\&TblSiz GT 0

; While TblSiz is larger than 0,

MAC.W@R0+,@R1+; this statement is iteratively assembled.

\&TblSiz-1; 1 is subtracted from TblSiz.

MACL,R0; The result is obtained in R0.

TblSiz: .ASSIGNA.AENDW
STS

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 210 of 391

7.2

Conditional Assembly Directives

This assembler provides the following conditional assembly directives.

.ASSIGNA

Defines an integer preprocessor variable. The defined variable canbe redefined.

.ASSIGNC

Defines a character preprocessor variable. The defined variable
can be redefined.

.DEFINE

Defines a preprocessor replacement character string.

.AIF.AELIF.AELSE.AENDI.AIFDEF.AELSE.AENDI.AREPEAT.AENDR

Determines whether or not to assemble a part of a source program
according to the specified condition. When the condition issatisfied, the statements after the .AIF are assembled. When notsatisfied, the statements after the .AELIF or .AELSE areassembled.
Determines whether or not to assemble a part of a source program
according to the replacement symbol definition. When thereplacement symbol is defined, the statements after the .AIFDEF
are assembled. When not defined, the statements after the .AELSE
are assembled.
Repeats assembly of a part of a source program (between.AREPEAT and .AENDR) the specified number of times.

.AENDW

Assembles a part of a source program (between .AWHILE and.AENDW) iteratively while the specified condition is satisfied.

.AERROR

Processes an error during preprocessor expansion.

.EXITM

Terminates .AREPEAT or .AWHILE iterated expansion.

.ALIMITSpecifies the maximum count of .AWHILE expansion.

.AWHILE

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 211 of 391

.ASSIGNA
Integer Preprocessor Variable Definition (Redefinition Is Possible)
Syntax<preprocessor variable>[:]∆.ASSIGNA∆<value>

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter the name of the preprocessor variable.
2. Operation
Enter the .ASSIGNA mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the value to be assigned to the preprocessor variable.
Description
1. .ASSIGNA is the assembler directive that defines a value for an integer preprocessor variable.
The syntax of integer preprocessor variables is the same as that for symbols. An integer
preprocessor variable can be defined with up to 32 characters, and uppercase and lowercase
letters are distinguished.
2. The preprocessor variables defined with the .ASSIGNA directive can be redefined with the.ASSIGNA directive.
3. The values for the preprocessor variables must be the following:— Constant (integer constant and character constant)— Defined preprocessor variable— Expression using the above as terms
4. Defined preprocessor variables are valid from the point of specification forward in the source
program.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 212 of 391

.ASSIGNA

5. Defined preprocessor variables can be referenced in the following locations:— .ASSIGNA directive— .ASSIGNC directive— .AIF directive— .AELIF directive— .AREPEAT directive— .AWHILE directive— Macro body (source statements between .MACRO and .ENDM)
When referencing integer preprocessor variables, insert a backslash (\)* and an ampersand (&)
in front of them.
\&<preprocessor variable>[']To clearly distinguish the preprocessor variable name from the rest of the source statement, anapostrophe (') can be added.
Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.
6. When a preprocessor character string is defined by a command line option, the .ASSIGNA
directive specifying the preprocessor variable having the same name as the character string isinvalidated.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 213 of 391

.ASSIGNA

Coding Example

RN:
.REG
(R0)
SHIFT: .ASSIGNA 27; This example generates a general-purpose multiple-bit; shift instruction which shifts bits to the right by the; number of SHIFT.
; R0 is set to Rn.
; 27 is set to SHIFT.

.AIF \&SHIFT GE 16; Condition: SHIFT ≥ 16
SHLR16 Rn; When the condition is satisfied, Rn is shifted to the right by 16 bits.
SHIFT: .ASSIGNA \&SHIFT-16 ; 16 is subtracted from SHIFT.
.AENDI.AIF \&SHIFT GE 8
SHLR8 RnSHIFT: .ASSIGNA \&SHIFT-8.AENDI; Condition: SHIFT ≥ 8; When the condition is satisfied, Rn is shifted to the right by 8 bits.
; 8 is subtracted from SHIFT.

.AIF \&SHIFT GE 4
SHLR2 Rn
SHLR2 RnSHIFT: .ASSIGNA \&SHIFT-4.AENDI; Condition: SHIFT ≥ 4; When the condition is satisfied, Rn is shifted to the right by 4 bits.
;; 4 is subtracted from SHIFT.

.AIF \&SHIFT GE 2
SHLR2 RnSHIFT: .ASSIGNA \&SHIFT-2.AENDI; Condition: SHIFT ≥ 2; When the condition is satisfied, Rn is shifted to the right by 2 bits.
; 2 is subtracted from SHIFT.

.AIF \&SHIFT EQ 1
SHLRRn
.AENDI; Condition: SHIFT = 1; When the condition is satisfied, Rn is shifted to the right by 1 bit.

The expanded results are as follows:
SHLR16 R0; When the condition is satisfied, Rn is shifted to the right by 16 bits.
SHLR8
R0; When the condition is satisfied, Rn is shifted to the right by 8 bits.
SHLR2
R0; When the condition is satisfied, Rn is shifted to the right by 2 bits.
SHLR
R0; When the condition is satisfied, Rn is shifted to the right by 1 bit.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 214 of 391

.ASSIGNC
Character Preprocessor Variable Definition (Redefinition Is Possible)
Syntax<preprocessor variable>[:]∆.ASSIGNC∆"<character string>"

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter the name of the preprocessor variable.
2. Operation
Enter the .ASSIGNC mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the character string enclosed with double quotation marks (").
Description
1. .ASSIGNC is the assembler directive that defines a character string for a character
preprocessor variable. The syntax of character preprocessor variables is the same as that forsymbols. A character preprocessor variable can be defined with up to 32 characters, anduppercase and lowercase letters are distinguished.
2. The preprocessor variables defined with the .ASSIGNC directive can be redefined with the.ASSIGNC directive.
3. Character strings are specified by characters or preprocessor variables enclosed with double
quotation marks (").
4. Defined preprocessor variables are valid from the point of specification forward in the source
program.
5. Defined preprocessor variables can be referenced in the following locations:— .ASSIGNA directive— .ASSIGNC directive— .AIF directive— .AELIF directive
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 215 of 391

.ASSIGNC— .AREPEAT directive— .AWHILE directive— Macro body (source statements between .MACRO and .ENDM)
When referencing character preprocessor variables, insert a backslash (\)* and an ampersand(&) in front of them.
\&<preprocessor variable>[']To clearly distinguish the preprocessor variable name from the rest of the source statement, anapostrophe (') can be added.
Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.
6. When a preprocessor character string is defined by a command line option, the .ASSIGNC
directive specifying the preprocessor variable having the same name as the character string isinvalidated.
Coding Example
FLAG:

∼

.ASSIGNC"ON"; "ON" is set to FLAG.

.AIF "\&FLAG" EQ "ON"; MOV R0,R1 is assembled

MOV R0,R1; when FLAG is "ON".

∼.AENDI"\&FLAG "; A space (" ") is added to FLAG.

FLAGA: .ASSIGNC"OFF"; "OFF" is added to FLAGA.

FLAG:"\&FLAG'AND \&FLAGA"FLAG:.ASSIGNC.ASSIGNC; An apostrophe (') is used to distinguish FLAG and; AND.

∼
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 216 of 391; FLAG finally becomes "ON AND OFF".

.DEFINE
Definition of Preprocessor Replacement Character String
Syntax<symbol>[:]∆.DEFINE∆"<replacement character string>"

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a symbol to be replaced with a character string.
2. Operation
Enter the .DEFINE mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter a character string to replace the symbol, enclosed with double quotation marks (").
Description
1. .DEFINE is the assembler directive that specifies that the symbol is replaced with thecorresponding character string.
2. The differences between the .DEFINE directive and the .ASSIGNC directive are as follows.
— The symbol defined by the .ASSIGNC directive can only be used in the preprocessor
statement; the symbol defined by the .DEFINE directive can be used in any statement.
— The symbols defined by the .ASSIGNA and the .ASSIGNC directives are referenced by the"\&symbol" format; the symbol defined by the .DEFINE directive is referenced by the"symbol" format.
— The .DEFINE symbol cannot be redefined.
3. The .DEFINE directive specifying a symbol is invalidated when the same replacement symbol
has been defined by a command line option.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 217 of 391

.DEFINE

Coding Example
SYM1:.DEFINE

"R1"

∼
MOV.L

SYM1,R0; Replaced with MOV.L R1,R0.

∼
Notes
1. A hexadecimal number starting with an alphabetical character a to f or A to F will be replacedwhen the same character string is specified as a replacement symbol by .DEFINE directive.
Add 0 to the beginning of the number to stop replacing such number.
A0:.DEFINE "0"
MOV.B#H'A0,R0; Replaced with MOV.B #H'0,R0.

MOV.B#H'0A0,R0; Not replaced.

2. A radix indication (B', Q', D', or H') will also be replaced when the same character string is
specified as a replacement symbol by .DEFINE directive. When specifying a symbol having
only one character, such as B, Q, D, H, b, q, d, or h, make sure that the corresponding radix
indication is not used.
B.DEFINE "H"
MOV.B#B'10,R0

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 218 of 391; Replaced with MOV.H #H'10,R0.

.AIF.AELIF.AELSE.AENDI

Conditional Assembly with Comparison
Syntax.AIF <term1> <relational operator> <term2><Source statements assembled if the AIF condition is satisfied>.AELIF <term1> <relational operator> <term2><Source statements assembled if the AELIF condition is satisfied>.AELSE<Source statements assembled if all the conditions are not satisfied>.AENDIStatement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .AIF, .AELIF (can be omitted), .AELSE (can be omitted), or .AENDI mnemonic.
3. Operands.AIF: Enter the condition. Refer to the description below.
.AELIF: Enter the condition. Refer to the description below.
.AELSE: The operand field is not used.
.AENDI: The operand field is not used.
Description
1. .AIF, .AELIF, .AELSE, and .AENDI are the assembler directives that select whether or not toassemble source statements according to the condition specified. The .AELIF and .AELSE
directives can be omitted.
2. .AELIF can be specified repeatedly between .AIF and .AELSE.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 219 of 391

.AIF.AELIF.AELSE.AENDI

3. The condition must be specified as follows:.AIF∆<term1>∆<relational operator>∆<term2>.AELIF∆<term1>∆<relational operator>∆<term2>
Terms are specified with numeric values or character strings. However, when a numeric value
and a character string are compared, the condition always fails.
Numeric values are specified by constants or preprocessor variables.
Character strings are specified by characters or preprocessor variables enclosed with double
quotation marks ("). To specify a double quotation mark in a character string, enter two double
quotation marks in succession.
4. The following relational operators can be used:
EQ: term1 = term2
NE: term1 ≠ term2
GT: term1 > term2
LT: term1 < term2
GE: term1 ≥ term2
LE: term1 ≤ term2
Note: Numeric values are handled as 32-bit signed integers. For character strings, only EQ and
NE conditions can be used.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 220 of 391

.AIF.AELIF.AELSE.AENDI

Coding Example∼.AIF \&TYPE EQ 1
MOV R0,R3; These statements

MOV R1,R4; are assembled

MOV R2,R5; when TYPE is 1.

.AELIF \&TYPE EQ 2
MOV R0,R6; These statements

MOV R1,R7; are assembled

MOV R2,R8; when TYPE is 2.

.AELSEMOV R0,R9; These statements

MOV R1,R10; are assembled

MOV R2,R11; when TYPE is not 1 nor 2.

.AENDI∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 221 of 391

.AIFDEF.AELSE.AENDI

Conditional Assembly with Definition
Syntax.AIFDEF <replacement symbol><statements to be assembled when the specified replacement symbol is defined>.AELSE<statements to be assembled when the specified replacement symbol is not defined>.AENDIStatement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .AIFDEF, .AELSE (can be omitted), or .AENDI mnemonic.
3. Operands.AIFDEF: Enter the condition. Refer to the description below.
.AELSE: The operand field is not used.
.AENDI: The operand field is not used.
Description
1. .AIFDEF, .AELSE, and .AENDI are the assembler directives that select whether or not toassemble source statements according to the replacement symbol definition.
2. The condition must be specified as follows.
.AIFDEF∆<replacement symbol>
The replacement symbol must be defined by the .DEFINE directive.
When the specified replacement symbol is defined by the command line option or in the source
statements before this directive, the condition is regarded as satisfied. When the replacement
symbol is defined after this directive or is not defined, the condition is regarded as unsatisfied.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 222 of 391

.AIFDEF.AELSE.AENDI

Coding Example∼.AIFDEF

FLAG

MOV

R0,R3

; These statements are assembled when

MOV

R1,R4

; FLAG is defined by .DEFINE directive.

MOV

R0,R6

; These statements are assembled when

MOV

R1,R7

; FLAG is not defined by .DEFINE directive.

.AELSE.AENDI∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 223 of 391

.AREPEAT.AENDR

Iterated Expansion
Syntax∆.AREPEAT <count><Source statements iteratively assembled>∆.AENDR

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .AREPEAT or .AENDR mnemonic.
3. Operands.AREPEAT: Enter the number of iterations.
.AENDR: The operand field is not used.
Description
1. .AREPEAT and .AENDR are the assembler directives that assemble source statements by
iteratively expanding them the specified number of times.
2. The source statements between the .AREPEAT and .AENDR directives are iterated thenumber of times specified with the .AREPEAT directive. Note that the source statements are
simply copied the specified number of times, and therefore, the operation is not a loop at
program execution.
3. Counts are specified by constants or preprocessor variables.
4. Nothing is expanded if a value of 0 or smaller is specified.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 224 of 391

.AREPEAT.AENDR

Coding Example; This example is a division of 64-bit data by 32-bit data.
; R1:R2 (64 bits) ˜ R0 (32 bits) = R2 (32 bits): Unsigned
TST

R0,R0

BT

zero_div

CMP/HS

R0,R1

BT

over_div; Zero divisor check; Overflow check; Flag initialization

DIV0U.AREPEAT 32
ROTCL

R2

; These statements are

DIV1

R0,R1

; iterated 32 times.

R2; R2 = quotient.AENDR
ROTCL

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 225 of 391

.AWHILE.AENDW

Conditional Iterated Expansion
Syntax∆.AWHILE∆<term1>∆<relational operator>∆<term2><Source statements iteratively assembled>∆.AENDW

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .AWHILE or .AENDW mnemonic.
3. Operands.AWHILE: Enter the condition to iteratively expand source statements.
.AENDW: The operand field is not used.
Description
1. .AWHILE and .AENDW are the assembler directives that assemble source statements by
iteratively expanding them while the specified condition is satisfied.
2. The source statements between the .AWHILE and .AENDW directives are iterated while thecondition specified with the .AWHILE directive is satisfied. Note that the source statements
are simply copied iteratively, and therefore, the operation is not a loop at program execution.
3. The condition must be specified as follows:.AWHILE∆<term1>∆<relational operator>∆<term2>
Terms are specified with numeric values or character strings. However, when a numeric value
and a character string are compared, the condition always fails.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 226 of 391

.AWHILE.AENDW

Numeric values are specified by constants or preprocessor variables.
Character strings are specified by characters or preprocessor variables enclosed with double
quotation marks ("). To specify a double quotation mark in a character string, enter two double
quotation marks (" ") in succession.
Conditional iterated expansion terminates when the condition finally fails.
CAUTION!
If a condition which never fails is specified, source statements are iteratively expanded for
65,535 times or until the maximum count of statement expansion specified by the .ALIMIT
directive is reached. Accordingly, the condition for this directive must be carefully specified.
4. The following relational operators can be used:
EQ: term1 = term2
NE: term1 ≠ term2
GT: term1 > term2
LT: term1 < term2
GE: term1 ≥ term2
LE: term1 ≤ term2
Note: Numeric values are handled as 32-bit signed integers. For character strings, only EQ and
NE conditions can be used.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 227 of 391

.AWHILE.AENDW

Coding Example; This example is a multiply and accumulate; operation.
TblSiz:.ASSIGNA

50; TblSiz: Data table size

MOV

A_Tbl1,R1; R1: Start address of data table 1

MOV

A_Tbl2,R2; R2: Start address of data table 2; MAC register initialization

CLRMAC

TblSiz:.AWHILE\&TblSiz GT 0 ; While TblSiz is larger than 0,

MAC.W@R0+,@R1+; this statement is iteratively assembled.

.ASSIGNA\&TblSiz-1; 1 is subtracted from TblSiz.

MACL,R0; The result is obtained in R0.

.AENDW
STS

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 228 of 391

.AERROR
Error Generation During Preprocessor Expansion
Syntax∆.AERROR

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .AERROR mnemonic.
3. Operands
The operand field is not used.
Description
1. When the .AERROR directive is assembled, error 667 is generated and the assembler isterminated with an error.
2. The .AERROR directive can be used to check values such as preprocessor variables.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 229 of 391

.AERROR

Coding Example∼.AIF\&FLG EQ 1

MOV

R1,R10

MOV

R2,R11.AELSE.AERROR.AENDI∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 230 of 391; When \&FLG is not 1, an error is generated.

.EXITM
Expansion Termination
Syntax∆.EXITM

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .EXITM mnemonic.
3. Operands
The operand field is not used.
Description
1. .EXITM is the assembler directive that terminates an iterated expansion (.AREPEAT to.AENDR) or a conditional iterated expansion (.AWHILE to .AENDW).
2. Each expansion is terminated when this directive appears.
3. This directive is also used to exit from macro expansions. The location of this directive mustbe specified carefully when macro instructions and iterated expansion are combined.
Reference:

Macro expansion→ Programmer's Guide, 8.2, "Macro Function Directives"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 231 of 391

.EXITM

Coding Example

∼
COUNT

.ASSIGNA 0.AWHILE

1 EQ 1; 0 is set to COUNT.
; An infinite loop (condition is always satisfied) is; specified.

COUNT

ADD

R0,R1

ADD

R2,R3

.ASSIGNA \&COUNT+1; 1 is added to COUNT.

.AIF; Condition: COUNT = 2\&COUNT EQ 2

.EXITM; When the condition is satisfied.AENDI; .AWHILE expansion is terminated.

.AENDW∼
When COUNT is updated and satisfies the condition specified with the .AIF directive, .EXITM is
assembled. When .EXITM is assembled, .AWHILE expansion is terminated.
The expansion results are as follows:
ADD

R0,R1...............When COUNT is 0

ADD

R2,R3

ADD

R0,R1...............When COUNT is 1

ADD

R2,R3

After this, COUNT becomes 2 and expansion is terminated.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 232 of 391

.ALIMIT
Maximum Count Specification for .AWHILE Expansion in Preprocessor
Syntax∆.ALIMIT<count>Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .ALIMIT mnemonic.
3. Operands
Enter the maximum count of statement expansion.
Description
1. During conditional iterated (.AWHILE to .AENDW) expansion, if the statement expansion
count exceeds the maximum value specified by the .ALIMIT directive, warning 854 isgenerated and the expansion is terminated.
2. If the .ALIMIT directive is not specified, the maximum count is 65,535.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 233 of 391

.ALIMIT

Coding Example

FLG:.ALIMIT∼

20.ASSIGNA

0.AWHILE\&FLG EQ 0

NOP
.AENDW∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 234 of 391; Expansion is terminated after performed; 20 times, and a warning message is output.

Section 8 Macro Function
8.1

Overview of the Macro Function

The macro function allows commonly used sequences of instructions to be named and defined as
one macro instruction. This is called a macro definition. Macro instructions are defined as follows:∼.MACRO <macro name><macro body>
.ENDM

∼

A macro name is the name assigned to a macro instruction, and a macro body is the statements tobe executed as the macro instruction.
Using a defined macro instruction by specifying the name is called a macro call. Macro
instructions are called as follows:∼∼<defined macro name>An example of macro definition and macro call is shown below.
Example:∼.MACRO SUM
MOV R0,R10
ADD R1,R10
ADD R2,R10
ADD R3,R10.ENDM; Processing to obtain the sum of R0, R1, R2,; and R3 is defined as macro instruction SUM.

SUM

; This statement calls macro instruction SUM.
; Macro body MOV R0,R10;
ADD R1,R10;
ADD R2,R10;
ADD R3,R10; is expanded from the macro instruction.

∼Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 235 of 391

Parts of the macro body can be replaced when expanded by the following procedure:
1. Macro definition
a. Declare formal parameters after the macro name in the .MACRO directive.
b. Use the formal parameters in the macro body. Formal parameters must be identified in themacro body by placing a backslash (\) in front of them.
2. Macro callSpecify macro parameters in the macro call.
When the macro instruction is expanded, the formal parameters are replaced with theircorresponding macro parameters.
Example:∼.MACROSUM ARG1

MOV R0,\ARG1; Formal parameter ARG1 is defined.
; ARG1 is referenced in the macro body.

ADD R1,\ARG1
ADD R2,\ARG1
ADD R3,\ARG1

∼

.ENDM

SUM R10; This statement calls macro instruction SUM; specifying macro parameter R10.
; The formal parameter in the macro body is; replaced with the macro parameter, andRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 236 of 391;

MOV R0,R10;

ADD R1,R10;

ADD R2,R10;

ADD R3,R10 is expanded.

8.2

Macro Function Directives

This assembler provides the following macro function directives.

.MACRO

Defines a macro instruction.

.ENDM.EXITM

Terminates macro instruction expansion.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 237 of 391

.MACRO.ENDM

Macro Definition
Syntax∆.MACRO∆<macro name>[∆<formal parameter>[=<default>][,<formal parameter>...]]∆.ENDM

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .MACRO or .ENDM mnemonic.
3. Operands.MACRO: Enter the name and formal parameters (can be omitted) for the macro instruction
to be defined. When formal parameters are defined, their defaults can be defined(defaults can be omitted).
.ENDM:The operand filed is not used.

Description
1. .MACRO and .ENDM are the assembler directives that define a macro instruction (a sequenceof source statements that are collectively named and handled together).
2. Macro definition
Naming as a macro instruction the source statements (macro body) between the .MACRO and.ENDM directives is called a macro definition.
3. Macro nameMacro names are the names assigned to macro instructions.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 238 of 391

.MACRO.ENDM

4. Formal parameters
Formal parameters are specified so that parts of the macro body can be replaced by specificparameters at expansion time. Formal parameters are replaced with the character strings(macro parameters) specified at macro expansion (macro call).
— Formal parameter syntax
The syntax for formal parameters is the same as that for symbols. A formal parameter canbe defined with up to 32 characters, and uppercase and lowercase letters are distinguished.
— Formal parameter reference
Formal parameters are used (referenced) at the part to be replaced in the macro body.
The syntax of formal parameter reference in macro bodies is as follows:\<formal parameter name>['] *To clearly distinguish the formal parameter name from the rest of the source statement, anapostrophe (') can be added.
Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.
5. Formal parameter defaults
Defaults for formal parameters can be specified in macro definitions. The default specifies thecharacter string to replace the formal parameter when the corresponding macro parameter isomitted in a macro call.
The default must be enclosed with double quotation marks (") or angle brackets (<>) if any of
the following characters are included in the default.
— Space— Tab— Comma (,)— Semicolon (;)— Double quotation marks (")— Angle brackets (< >)The assembler inserts defaults at macro expansion by removing the double quotation marks or
angle brackets that enclose the character strings.
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 239 of 391

.MACRO.ENDM

6. Restrictions on macro definitions— Macros cannot be defined in the following locations:• Macro bodies (between .MACRO and .ENDM directives)• Between .AREPEAT and .AENDR directives• Between .AWHILE and .AENDW directives— The .END directive cannot be used within a macro body.
— No symbol can be inserted in the label field of the .ENDM directive. The .ENDM directive
is ignored if a symbol is written in the label field, but no error is generated in this case.
Coding Example∼

SUM; Processing to obtain the sum of R0, R1, R2,

MOV R0,R10; and R3 is defined as macro instruction SUM.

.MACROADD R1,R10
ADD R2,R10
ADD R3,R10

∼

.ENDM

SUM

; This statement calls macro instruction SUM; Macro body MOV R0,R10

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 240 of 391;

ADD R1,R10;

ADD R2,R10;

ADD R3,R10 is expanded.

.EXITM
Expansion Termination
Syntax∆.EXITM

Statement Elements
1. Label
The label field is not used.
2. Operation
Enter the .EXITM mnemonic.
3. Operands
The operand field is not used.
Description
1. .EXITM is the assembler directive that terminates a macro expansion. This directive can be
specified within the macro body (between the .MACRO and .ENDM directives).
2. Expansion is terminated when this directive appears.
3. This directive is also used to exit from iterated expansions specified with the .AREPEAT or.AWHILE directive. The location of this directive must be specified carefully when macro
instructions and iterated expansion are combined.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 241 of 6

.EXITM

Coding Example.MACROSUM P1

MOV

R0,R10ADD

R1,R10ADD

R2,R10
(2)

\P1
ADD

(1)

R3,R10

.ENDM

~
SUM

.EXITM.EXITM is expanded at (2) and macro expansion is terminated. Only the statements indicatedby (1) are expanded.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 242 of 391

8.3

Macro Body

The source statements between the .MACRO and .ENDM directives are called a macro body. The
macro body is expanded and assembled by a macro call.
1. Formal parameter reference
Formal parameters are used to specify the parts to be replaced with macro parameters at macro
expansion.
The syntax of formal parameter reference in macro bodies is as follows:\<formal parameter name>['] *To clearly distinguish the formal parameter name from the rest of the source statement, add anapostrophe (').
Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.
Coding example:; P and P1 are formal parameters.

.MACRO

PLUS1 P,P1

ADD

#1,\P1; Formal parameter P1 is referenced.

.SDATA"\P'1"; Formal parameter P is referenced.

R,R1; PLUS1 is expanded.

.ENDM

∼

PLUS1

Expanded results are as follows:
ADD

#1,R1

; Formal parameter P1 is referenced.

.SDATA"R1"; Formal parameter P is referenced.

2. Preprocessor variable reference
Preprocessor variables can be referenced in macro bodies.
The syntax for preprocessor variable reference is as follows:\&<preprocessor variable name>['] *To clearly distinguish the preprocessor variable name from the rest of the source statement,
add an apostrophe (').
Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 243 of 391

Coding example:.MACRO

PLUS1

ADD#1,R\&V1; Preprocessor variable V1 is referenced.

.SDATA"\&V'1"; Preprocessor variable V is referenced.

.ENDM
V

.ASSIGNC "R"; Preprocessor variable V is defined.

V1.ASSIGNA 1; Preprocessor variable V1 is defined.

PLUS1; PLUS1 is expanded.

Expanded results are as follows:
ADD

#1,R1

; Preprocessor variable V1 is referenced.

.SDATA"R1"; Preprocessor variable V is referenced.

3. Macro generation number
The macro generation number facility is used to avoid the problem that symbols used within amacro body will be multiply defined if the macro is expanded multiple times. To avoid thisproblem, specify the macro generation number marker as part of any symbol used in a macro.
This will result in symbols that are unique to each macro call.
The macro generation number marker is expanded as a 5-digit decimal number (between
00000 and 99999) unique to the macro expansion.
The syntax for specifying the macro generation number marker is as follows:\@*

Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.
Two or more macro generation number markers can be written in a macro body, and they will
be expanded to the same number in one macro call.
CAUTION!
Because macro generation number markers are expanded to numbers, they must not be written
at the beginning of symbol names.
Reference: Programmer's Guide, 1.3.2, "Coding of Symbols"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 244 of 391

Coding example:

str\@.MACRO
MOV.L
BRA
NOP
.SDATA.ALIGNRES_STR STR, Rn#str\@,\Rn
end_str\@"\STR"
2

end_str\@.ENDM
RES_STR "ONE",R0
RES_STR "TWO",R1

Different symbols are generated
each time RES_STR is expanded.

Expanded results are as follows:
MOV.L
BRA
NOP
str00000 .SDATA.ALIGN
end_str00000
MOV.L
BRA
NOP
str00001 .SDATA.ALIGN
end_str00001#str00000,R0
end_str00000"ONE"2#str00001,R1
end_str00001"TWO"
2

4. Macro replacement processing exclusion
When a backslash (\) appears in a macro body, it specifies macro replacement processing.
Therefore, a means for excluding this macro processing is required when it is necessary to use
the backslash as an ASCII character.
The syntax for macro replacement processing exclusion is as follows:\(<macro replacement processing excluded character string>) *Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.
The backslash and the parentheses will be removed in macro processing.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 245 of 391

Coding example:.MACROBACK_SLASH_SET\(MOV#"\",R0); \ is expanded as an ASCII character.

.ENDM

Expanded results are as follows:
MOV#"\",R0; \ is expanded as an ASCII character.

5. Comments in macros
Comments in macro bodies can be coded as normal comments or as macro internal comments.
When comments in the macro body are not required in the macro expansion code (to avoid
repeating the same comment in the listing file), those comments can be coded as macrointernal comments to suppress their expansion.
The syntax for macro internal comments is as follows:\;<comment> *Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.
Coding example:.MACRO PUSH Rn
MOV.L\Rn,@-R15\;\Rn is a register.

.ENDM
PUSH

R0

Expanded results are as follows (the comment is not expanded):
MOV.L

R0,@-R15

6. Character string manipulation functions
Character string manipulation functions can be used in a macro body. The following character
string manipulation functions are provided.
.LEN: Character string length.

.INSTR: Character string search.

.SUBSTR: Character string extraction.

References:.LEN → Programmer's Guide, 8.5, "Character String Manipulation Functions", .LEN
.INSTR → Programmer's Guide, 8.5, "Character String Manipulation Functions", .INSTR.SUBSTR → Programmer's Guide, 8.5, "Character String Manipulation Functions", .SUBSTR
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 246 of 391

8.4

Macro Call

Expanding a defined macro instruction is called a macro call. The syntax for macro calls is asfollows:
Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆<macro name>[∆<macro parameter> [,<macro parameter>...]]

Statement Elements
1. LabelEnter a reference symbol if required.
2. Operation
Enter the macro name to be expanded. The macro name must have been already defined before
a macro call.
3. Operands
Enter character strings as macro parameters to replace formal parameters at macro expansion.
The formal parameters must have been declared in the macro definition with .MACRO.
Description
1. Macro parameter specification
Macro parameters can be specified by either positional specification or keyword specification.
— Positional specification
The macro parameters are specified in the same order as that of the formal parameters
declared in the macro definition with .MACRO.
— Keyword specification
Each macro parameter is specified following its corresponding formal parameter, separated
by an equal sign (=).

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 247 of 391

2. Macro parameter syntax
Macro parameters must be enclosed with double quotation marks (") or angle brackets (<>) if
any of the following characters are included in the macro parameters:— Space— Tab— Comma (,)— Semicolon (;)— Double quotation marks (")— Angle brackets (< >)Macro parameters are inserted by removing the double quotation marks or angle brackets that
enclose character strings at macro expansion.
Coding Example

COUNT.MACRO SUM FROM=0,TO=9; Macro instruction SUM and formal

MOV; parameters FROM and TO are defined.

R\FROM,R10.ASSIGNA\FROM+1.AWHILE \&COUNT LE \TO
MOV
COUNT

R\&COUNT,R10.ASSIGNA\&COUNT+1

Macro body is codedusing formal parameters.

.AENDW
.ENDM
SUM

0,5

Both will be expanded

SUM

TO=5

into the same statements.

Expanded results are as follows (the formal parameters in the macro body are replaced withmacro parameters):
MOV

R0,R10

MOV

R1,R10

MOV

R2,R10

MOV

R3,R10

MOV

R4,R10

MOV

R5,R10Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 248 of 391

8.5

Character String Manipulation Functions

This assembler provides the following character string manipulation functions.

.LEN

Counts the length of a character string.

.INSTR

Searches for a character string.

.SUBSTR

Extracts a character string.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 249 of 391

.LEN
Character String Length Count
Syntax.LEN[∆]("<character string>")

Description
1. .LEN counts the number of characters in a character string and replaces itself with the numberof characters in decimal with no radix.
2. Character strings are specified by enclosing the desired characters with double quotation marks("). To specify a double quotation mark in a character string, enter two double quotation marks
in succession.
3. Macro formal parameters and preprocessor variables can be specified in the character string as
shown below.
.LEN("\<formal parameter>").LEN("\&<preprocessor variable>") *Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.
4. This function can only be used within a macro body (between .MACRO and .ENDM
directives).

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 250 of 391

.LEN

Coding Example:∼.MACRO RESERVE_LENGTH P1.ALIGN 4.SRES.

.LEN("\P1")

∼

.ENDM

RESERVE_LENGTH ABCDEF
RESERVE_LENGTH ABC

Expanded results are as follows:.ALIGN

4

.SRES

6

.ALIGN

4

.SRES

3

; "ABCDEF" has six characters.
; "ABC" has three characters.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 251 of 391

.INSTR
Character String Search
Syntax.INSTR[∆]("<character string 1>","<character string 2>"[,<start position>])Description
1. .INSTR searches character string 1 for character string 2, and replaces itself with the numericalvalue of the position of the found string (with 0 indicating the start of the string) in decimalwith no radix. .INSTR is replaced with –1 if character string 2 does not appear in character
string 1.
2. Character strings are specified by enclosing the desired characters with double quotation marks("). To specify a double quotation mark in a character string, enter two double quotation marks
in succession.
3. The <start position> parameter specifies the search start position as a numerical value, with 0
indicating the start of character string 1. Zero is used as default when this parameter is omitted.
4. Macro formal parameters and preprocessor variables can be specified in the character strings
and as the start position as shown below.
.INSTR("\<formal parameter>", ...)
.INSTR("\&<preprocessor variable>", ...) *Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.
5. This function can only be used within a macro body (between the .MACRO and .ENDM
directives).

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 252 of 391

.INSTR

Coding Example:∼.MACRO FIND_STR P1.DATA.W .INSTR("ABCDEFG","\P1",0)

∼

.ENDM

FIND_STR CDE
FIND_STR H

Expanded results are as follows:.DATA.W

2; The start position of "CDE" is 2 (0 indicating the.DATA.W-1; "ABCDEFG" includes no "H".

beginning of the string) in "ABCDEFG"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 253 of 391

.SUBSTR
Character Substring Extraction
Syntax.SUBSTR[∆]("<character string>",<start position>,<extraction length>)

Description
1. .SUBSTR extracts from the specified character string a substring starting at the specified start
position of the specified length. .SUBSTR is replaced with the extracted character string
enclosed with double quotation marks (").
2. Character strings are specified by enclosing the desired characters in double quotation marks("). To specify a double quotation mark in a character string, enter two double quotation
marks in succession.
3. The value of the extraction start position must be 0 or greater. The value of the extraction
length must be 1 or greater.
4. If illegal or inappropriate values are specified for the <start position> or <extraction length>parameters, this function is replaced with a space (" ").
5. Macro formal parameters and preprocessor variables can be specified in the character string,
and as the start position and extraction length parameters as shown below.
.SUBSTR("\<formal parameter>", ...).SUBSTR("\&<preprocessor variable>", ...) *Note: When using a Japanese environment, use ¥ instead of \.
6. This function can only be used within a macro body (between the .MACRO and .ENDM
directives).

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 254 of 391

.SUBSTR

Coding Example:∼.MACRO RESERVE_STR P1=0,P2.SDATA.SUBSTR("ABCDEFG",\P1,\P2)

∼

.ENDM

RESERVE_STR 2,2
RESERVE_STR ,3; Macro parameter P1 is omitted.

Expanded results are as follows:.SDATA"CD".SDATA"ABC"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 255 of 391

Section 9 Automatic Literal Pool Generation Function
9.1

Overview of Automatic Literal Pool Generation

To move 2-byte or 4-byte constant data (referred to below as a "literal") to a register, a literal pool(a collection of literals) must be reserved and referred to in PC relative addressing mode. For
literal pool location, the following must be considered:• Is data stored within the range that can be accessed by data move instructions?
• Is 2-byte data aligned to a 2-byte boundary and is 4-byte data aligned to a 4-byte boundary?
• Can data be shared by several data move instructions?
• Where in the program should the literal pool be located?
The assembler automatically generates from a single instruction a .DATA directive and a PC
relative MOV or MOVA instruction, which moves constant data to a register.
For example, this function enables program (a) below to be coded as (b):
(a)

MOV.L

DATA1,R0

MOV.L

DATA2,R1∼.ALIGN 4DATA1.DATA.L H'12345678

DATA2.DATA.L 500000

(b)

MOV.L

#H'12345678,R0

MOV.L#500000,R1∼

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 257 of 391

9.2

Extended Instructions Related to Automatic Literal Pool Generation

The assembler automatically generates a literal pool corresponding to an extended instruction(MOV.W #imm, Rn; MOV.L #imm, Rn; or MOVA #imm, R0) and calculates the PC relative
displacement value.
An extended instruction source statement is expanded to an executable instruction and literal data
as shown in table 9-1.
Table 9-1

Extended Instructions and Expanded Results

Extended Instruction

Expanded Result

MOV.W #imm, Rn

MOV.W @(disp, PC), Rn and 2-byte literal data

MOV.L #imm, Rn

MOV.L @(disp, PC), Rn and 4-byte literal data

MOVA

#imm, R0

MOVA

9.3

Size Mode for Automatic Literal Pool Generation@(disp, PC), R0 and 4-byte literal data

Automatic literal pool generation has two modes: size specification mode and size selection mode.
In size specification mode, a data move instruction (extended instruction) whose operation size isprespecified is used to generate a literal pool. In size selection mode, when a move instruction
without size specification is written, the assembler automatically checks the imm operand value
and selects a suitable-size move instruction.
Table 9-2 shows data move instructions and size mode.
Table 9-2

Data Move Instructions and Size Mode

Data Move Instruction

Size Specification Mode

MOV

Size Selection Mode#imm, Rn

Executable instruction

Selected by assembler

MOV.B #imm, Rn

Executable instruction

Executable instruction

MOV.W #imm, Rn

Extended instruction

Extended instruction

MOV.L #imm, Rn

Extended instruction

Extended instruction

Size Specification Mode:In this mode, a data move instruction without size specification (MOV #imm,Rn) is handled as anormal executable instruction. This mode is used when –AUTO_LITERAL is not specified as thecommand line option.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 258 of 391

Size Selection Mode:In this mode, when a data move instruction without size specification (MOV #imm,Rn) is written,
the assembler checks the imm operand value and automatically generates a literal pool ifnecessary. The imm value is checked for the signed value range.
This mode is used when –AUTO_LITERAL is specified as the command line option.
Table 9-3 shows the instructions selected depending on imm value range.
Table 9-3

Instructions Selected in Size Selection Mode

imm Specification

imm Value Range*

Selected Instruction

Constant or back-reference
absolute value

H'FFFFFF80 to H'0000007F(–128 to 127)

MOV.B #imm, Rn

H'FFFF8000 to H'FFFFFF7F(–32,768 to –129)
H'00000080 to H'00007FFF(128 to 32,767)

MOV.W #imm, Rn
Expansion result:[MOV.W @(disp, PC), Rn and2-byte literal data]

H'80000000 to H'FFFF7FFF(–2,147,483,648 to –32,769)
H'00008000 to H'7FFFFFFF(32,768 to 2,147,483,647)

MOV.L #imm, Rn
Expansion result:[MOV.L @(disp, PC), Rn and4-byte literal data]

Does not depend on imm
value

MOV.L #imm, Rn
Expansion result:[MOV.L @(disp, PC), Rn and4-byte literal data]

Relative value or forwardreference absolute value

Note: The values in parentheses ( ) are decimal.

Reference:–AUTO_LITERAL→ User's Guide, 2.2.8, "Automatic Literal Pool Generation Command Line Option"Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 259 of 391

9.4

Literal Pool Output

The literal pool is output to one of the following locations:• After an unconditional branch and its delay slot instruction• Where a .POOL directive has been specified by the programmer
The assembler outputs the literal corresponding to an extended instruction to the nearest output
location following the extended instruction. The assembler gathers the literals to be output as aliteral pool.
CAUTION!
When a label is specified in a delay slot instruction, no literal pool will be output to the location
following the delay slot.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 260 of 391

9.4.1

Literal Pool Output after Unconditional Branch

An example of literal pool output is shown below.

Source program.SECTION CD1,CODE,LOCATE=H'0000F000
CD1_START:
MOV.L #H'FFFF0000,R0
MOV.W #H'FF00,R1
MOV.L #CD1_START,R2
MOV#H'FF,R3
RTS
MOV
R0,R10.END↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓Automatic literal pool generation result (source list)
1 0000F000
2 0000F000
3 0000F000 D003
4 0000F002 9103
5 0000F004 D203
6 0000F006 E3FF
7 0000F008 000B
8 0000F00A 6A03
9
10 0000F00C FF00
11 0000F00E 0000
12 0000F010 FFFF0000
13 0000F014 0000F000
14
15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

9

.SECTION CD1,CODE,LOCATE=H'0000F000
CD1_STARTMOV.L#H'FFFF0000,R0
MOV.W#H'FF00,R1
MOV.L#CD1_START,R2
MOV#H'FF,R3
RTS
MOV
R0,R10**** BEGIN-POOL ****DATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 4
ALIGNMENT CODEDATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 3
DATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 5**** END-POOL ****
.END

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 261 of 391

9.4.2

Literal Pool Output to the .POOL Location

If literal pool output location after unconditional branches is not available within the valid
displacement range (because the program has a small number of unconditional branches), theassembler outputs error 402. In this case, a .POOL directive must be specified within the valid
displacement range.
The valid displacement range is as follows:• Word-size operation: 0 to 511 bytes• Longword-size operation: 0 to 1023 bytes
When a literal pool is output to a .POOL location, a branch instruction is also inserted to jumpover the literal pool.
An example of literal pool output is shown on the following page.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 262 of 391

Source program.SECTION CD1,CODE,LOCATE=H'0000F000
CD1_STARTMOV.L#H'FFFF0000,R0
MOV.W#H'FF00,R1
MOV.L#CD1_START,R2
MOV#H'FF,R3.POOL.END↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓Automatic literal pool generation result (source list)
1 0000F000
2 0000F000
3 0000F000 D003
4 0000F002 9103
5 0000F004 D203
6 0000F006 E3FF
7 0000F008
89 0000F008 A006
10 0000F00A 0009
11 0000F00C FF00
12 0000F00E 0000
13 0000F010 FFFF0000
14 0000F014 0000F000
15
16

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

.SECTION CD1,CODE,LOCATE=H'0000F000
CD1_START:MOV.L#H'FFFF0000,R0
MOV.W#H'FF00,R1
MOV.L#CD1_START,R2
MOV#H'FF,R3.POOL**** BEGIN-POOL ****
BRA TO END-POOLNOP
DATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 4
ALIGNMENT CODEDATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 3
DATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 5**** END-POOL ****
8
.END

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 263 of 391

9.5

Literal Sharing

When the literals for several extended instructions are gathered into a literal pool, the assembler
makes the extended instructions share identical immediate data.
The following operand forms can be identified and shared:• Symbol• Constant• Symbol ± constantIn addition to the above, expressions that are determined to have the same value at assembly
processing may be shared.
However, extended instructions having different operation sizes do not share literal data evenwhen they have the same immediate data.
An example of literal data sharing among extended instructions is shown on the following page.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 264 of 391

Source program.SECTION CD1,CODE,LOCATE=H'0000F000
CD1_START:MOV.L#H'FFFF0000,R0
MOV.W#H'FF00,R1
MOV.L#H'FFFF0000,R2
MOV#H'FF,R3
RTS
MOV
R0,R10.END↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓Automatic literal pool generation result (source list)
1 0000F000
2 0000F000
3 0000F000 D003
4 0000F002 9103
5 0000F004 D202
6 0000F006 E3FF
7 0000F008 000B
8 0000F00A 6A03
9
10 0000F00C FF00
11 0000F00E 0000
12 0000F010 FFFF0000
13
14

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

9

.SECTION CD1,CODE,LOCATE=H'0000F000
CD1_START:MOV.L#H'FFFF0000,R0
MOV.W#H'FF00,R1
MOV.L#H'FFFF0000,R2
MOV#H'FF,R3
RTS
MOV
R0,R10**** BEGIN-POOL ****DATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 4
ALIGNMENT CODEDATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 3,5**** END-POOL ****
.END

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 265 of 391

9.6

Literal Pool Output Suppression

When a program has too many unconditional branches, the following problems may occur:• Many small literal pools are output• Literals are not shared
In these cases, suppress literal pool output as shown below.

∼<delayed branch instruction><delay slot instruction>.NOPOOL∼

ExampleSource program~
CASE1:MOV.L#H'FFFF0000,R0
RTS
NOP.NOPOOL--------- Extended instruction 1

MOV.L
RTS
NOP

--------- Extended instruction 2--------- No literal pool is output here

CASE2:#H'FFFF0000,R0~--------- Literal pool is output here↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓Automatic literal pool generation result (source list)~
20 0000F000
21 0000F000 D002
22 0000F002 000B
23 0000F004 0009
24
25 0000F006
26 0000F006 D001
27 0000F008 000B
28 0000F00A 0009
29
30 0000F00C FFFF0000
31~Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 266 of 391

20 CASE1:
21
MOV.L#H'FFFF0000,R0
22
RTS
23
NOP
24
.NOPOOL
25 CASE2:
26
MOV.L#H'FFFF0000,R0
27
RTS
28
NOP
**** BEGIN-POOL ****DATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 21,26**** END-POOL ****

9.7

Notes on Automatic Literal Pool Output

1. If an error occurs when an extended instruction is written
a. Extended instructions must not be specified in delay slots (error 151).
b. Extended instructions must not be specified in relative sections having a boundaryalignment value of less than 2 (error 152).
c. MOV.L #imm, Rn or MOVA #imm, R0 must not be specified in relative sections having aboundary alignment value of less than 4 (error 152).
2. If an error occurs when a .POOL directive is written.POOL directives must not be written after unconditional branches (error 522).
3. If an error occurs when a .NOPOOL directive is written.NOPOOL directives are valid only when written after delay slot instructions. If written atother locations, the .NOPOOL directive causes error 521.
4. If the displacement of an executable instruction exceeds the valid range when an extended
instruction is expanded
The assembler generates a literal pool and outputs error 402 for the instruction having adisplacement outside the valid range.
Solution: Move the literal pool output location (for example, by the .NOPOOL directive), orchange the location or addressing mode of the instruction causing the error.
5. If the literal pool output location cannot be foundIf the assembler cannot find a literal pool output location satisfying the following conditions in
respect to the extended instruction,— Same file
— Same section— Forward direction
The assembler outputs, at the end of the section which includes the extended instruction, theliteral pool and a BRA instruction with a NOP instruction in the delay slot to jump around theliteral pool, and outputs warning 876.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 267 of 391

6. If the displacement from the extended instruction exceeds the valid range
If the displacement of the literal pool from the extended instruction exceeds the valid range,error 402 is generated.
Solution: Output the literal pool within the valid range (for example, using the .POOL
directive.)
7. Differences between size specification mode and size selection mode
Version 2.0 of the assembler can only use the size specification mode, but the size selection
mode is added to this new assembler version. If the source program created before for version
2.0 is assembled in the size selection mode by version 3.1 or higher, the imm values of data
move instructions without size specifications will differ by H'00000080 to H'000000FF (128 to255) from these assembled by version 2.0.
An example of source listing output in the size specification mode and size selection mode isshown on the following page.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 268 of 391

Example:
Source program.SECTION CD1,CODE,LOCATE=H'0000F000
MOV.L#H'FF,R0
MOV.W#H'FF,R1
MOV.B#H'FF,R2
MOV#H'FF,R3
RTS
MOV
R0,R10.END↓ ↓ ↓ ↓

Automatic literal pool output in size specification mode (source listing)
1 0000F000
2 0000F000 D003
3 0000F002 9103
4 0000F004 E2FF
5 0000F006 E3FF
6 0000F008 000B
7 0000F00A 6A03
8
9 0000F00C 00FF
10 0000F00E 0000
11 0000F010 000000FF
12
13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8

.SECTION CD1,CODE,LOCATE=H'0000F000
MOV.L#H'FF,R0
MOV.W#H'FF,R1
MOV.B#H'FF,R2
MOV#H'FF,R3
RTS
MOV
R0,R10***** BEGIN-POOL *****DATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 3
ALIGNMENT CODEDATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 2***** END-POOL *****.END

The contents of R3 is H'FFFFFFFF.

Automatic literal pool output in size selection mode (source listing)
1 0000F000
12 0000F000 D003
23 0000F002 9103
34 0000F004 E2FF
45 0000F006 9301
56 0000F008 000B
6
7 0000F00A 6A03
7
8
9 0000F00C 00FF
10 0000F00E 0000
11 0000F010 000000FF
1213
8The contents of R3 is H'000000FF.

.SECTION CD1,CODE,LOCATE=H'0000F000
MOV.L#H'FF,R0
MOV.W#H'FF,R1
MOV.B#H'FF,R2
MOV#H'FF,R3
RTS
MOV
R0,R10***** BEGIN-POOL *****DATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 3,5
ALIGNMENT CODEDATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 2***** END-POOL *****.END

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 269 of 391

Section 10 Automatic Repeat Loop Generation Function
10.1

Overview of Automatic Repeat Loop Generation Function

In the SH-DSP, the start and end addresses of the repeat loop are set in the RS and RE registers by
the LDRS and LDRE instructions. The address settings differ depending on the number of
instructions in the repeat loop. When setting the address, consider the relationship between theaddress and the number of instructions in the repeat loop shown in table 10-1.
Table 10-1 Repeat Loop Instructions and Address Setting
Register NameOne Instruction

Two
Instructions

Three
Instructions

Four or more
Instructions

RSs_addr0+8

s_addr0+6

s_addr0+4

s_addrRE

s_addr0+4

s_addr0+4

s_addr0+4

e_addr3+4

s_addr0: Address of the instruction one instruction before the repeat loop start addresss_addr: Repeat loop start addresse_addr3: Address of the instruction three instructions before the repeat loop end address

The automatic repeat loop generation function automatically generates the PC relative instructions
LDRS and LDRE, and the SETRC instruction from a single instruction. The LDRS and LDRE
instructions transfer the repeat loop start and end addresses based on the number of instructions in
the repeat loop to the RS and RE registers, and the SETRC instruction specifies the repetition
count.
For example, program A can be written as program B when using the automatic repeat loop
generation function.
Program A:
LDRS s_addr0+6
LDRE s_addr0+4
SETRC #10
s_addr0:

NOP

PADD A0,M0,A0 ;Repeat loop start address

PCMP X1,M0

Repeat loop end address;

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 271 of 391

Program B:
REPEAT s_addr,e_addr,#10
NOP
s_addr:

PADD A0,M0,A0 ;Repeat loop start addresse_addr:

PCMP X1,M0

Repeat loop end address

10.2

;

Extended Instructions of Automatic Repeat Loop Generation
Function

The assembler automatically generates necessary instructions from extended instructions(REPEAT s_label,e_label,#imm, REPEAT s_label,e_label,Rn, and REPEAT s_label,e_label) andcalculates the PC relative displacement.
Table 10-2 lists the source statement of each extended instruction and its expanded results of twoor three executable instructions.
Table 10-2 Extended Instructions and Expanded Results
Extended Instruction

Expanded Results

REPEAT s_label,e_label,#imm

LDRS @(disp,PC), LDRE@(disp,PC), andSETRC #imm

REPEAT s_label,e_label,Rn

LDRS @(disp,PC), LDRE@(disp,PC), andSETRC Rn

REPEAT s_label,e_label

LDRS @(disp,PC) and LDRE@(disp,PC)

10.3

REPEAT Description

Syntax[<symbol>[:]]∆REPEAT∆<start address>,<end address>[,<repeat count>]

Statement Elements
1. Start and end addresses
Enter the labels of the start and end addresses of the repeat loop.
2. Repeat countEnter the repeat count as an immediate value or as a general register name.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 272 of 391

Description
1. REPEAT automatically generates the executable instructions LDRS and LDRE to repeat the
instructions in the range from the start address to the end address.
2. When the repeat count is specified, REPEAT generates a SETRC instruction. When the repeat
count is omitted, SETRC is not generated.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 273 of 391

10.4

Coding Examples

To Repeat Four or More Instructions (Basic Example):
REPEAT RptStart,RptEnd,#5
PCLR Y0
PCLR A0
RptStart: MOVX @R4+,X1 MOVY @R6+,Y1
PADD A0,Y0,Y0 PMULS X1,Y1,A0
DCT PCLR A0
AND R0,R4
RptEnd:AND R0,R6

This program repeats execution of five instructions from RptStart to RptEnd five times.
The above program has the same meaning as the following:
LDRS RptStart
LDRE RptEnd3+4
SETRC #5
PCLR Y0
PCLR A0
RptStart: MOVX @R4+,X1 MOVY @R6+,Y1
RptEnd3:

PADD A0,Y0,Y0 PMULS X1,Y1,A0;

DCT PCLR A0
AND R0,R4
RptEnd:AND R0,R6

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 274 of 391

The label is not actually generated.

To Repeat One Instruction: Specify the same labels as the start and end addresses.
REPEAT Rpt,Rpt,R0
MOVX @R4+,X1 MOVY @R6,Y1
Rpt:

PADD A0,Y0,Y0 PMULS X1,Y1,A0 MOVX @R4+,X1 MOVY @R6+,Y1

The above program has the same meaning as the following:
LDRS RptStart0+8
LDRE RptStart0+4
SETRC R0
; The label is not actually generated.

RptStart0: MOVX @R4+,X1 MOVY @R6,Y1
Rpt:

PADD A0,Y0,Y0 PMULS X1,Y1,A0 MOVX @R4+,X1 MOVY @R6+,Y1

To Repeat Two Instructions:
REPEAT RptStart,RptEnd,#10
PCLR Y0
RptStart:

MOVX @R4+,X1 MOVY @R6+,Y1

RptEnd:PADD A0,Y0,Y0 PMULS X1,Y1,A0

The above program has the same meaning as the following:
LDRS RptStart0+6
LDRE RptStart0+4
SETRC #10
RptStart0: PCLR Y0; The label is not actually generated.

RptStart:

MOVX @R4+,X1 MOVY @R6+,Y1

RptEnd:PADD A0,Y0,Y0 PMULS X1,Y1,A0

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 275 of 391

To Repeat Three Instructions:
REPEAT RptStart,RptEnd,R0
PCLR Y0
RptStart:

MOVX @R4+,X1 MOVY @R6+,Y1
PMULS X1,Y1,A0

RptEnd:PADD A0,Y0,Y0

The above program has the same meaning as the following:
LDRE RptStart0+4
LDRS RptStart0+4
SETRC R0
RptStart0: PCLR Y0
RptStart:; The label is not actually generated.

MOVX @R4+,X1 MOVY @R6+,Y1
PMULS X1,Y1,A0

RptEnd:PADD A0,Y0,Y0

To Omit the Repeat Count: When the repeat count is omitted, the assembler does not generate
SETRC. To separate the LDRS and LDRE from the SETRC, omit the repeat count.
REPEAT RptStart,RptEnd; The LDRS and LDRE are expanded here.
MOV #10,R0
OuterLoop:
SETRC #16
PCLR Y0
PCLR A0
RptStart: MOVX @R4+,X1 MOVY @R6+,Y1
PADD A0,Y0,Y0 PMULS X1,Y1,A0
DCT PCLR A0
AND R0,R4
RptEnd:AND R0,R6
DT R0
BF OuterLoop

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 276 of 391

10.5

Notes on the REPEAT Extended Instruction

Start and End Addresses: Only labels in the same section or local labels in the same local block
can be specified as the start and end addresses.
The start address must come after (be at a higher address than) the REPEAT extended instruction.
The end address must come after (be at a higher address than) the start address.
Reference: Local labels→ Programmer's Guide, 1.8, "Local Label"
Instructions Inside Loops:• If one of the following assembler directives that reserve a data item or a data area or an .ORG
directive is used inside a loop, the assembler outputs a warning message and counts the
directive as one of the instructions to be repeated. If an .ALIGN directive is used inside a loop
to adjust the boundary alignment, the assembler outputs a warning message and counts the
directive as one of the instructions to be repeated.
Directives generating a warning inside loops:.DATA, .DATAB, .SDATA, .SDATAB, .SDATAC, .SDATAZ, .FDATA, .FDATAB,.XDATA, .RES, .SRES, .SRESC, .SRESZ, .FRES, .ALIGN, and .ORG
• The assembler stops automatic generation of literal pools within a loop. Therefore, even whenan unconditional branch is used in a loop, no literal pool is generated. If a .POOL directive isused in a loop, the assembler outputs a warning message and ignores the .POOL directive.
Instruction Immediately before Loop: If three or fewer instructions are to be repeated, theinstruction immediately before the loop must be an executable instruction or a DSP instruction.
Therefore, when three or fewer instructions are to be repeated and if one of the following islocated immediately before the start address of the loop, the assembler outputs an error.
• Assembler directives that reserve a data item or a data area or .ORG directive.DATA, .DATAB, .SDATA, .SDATAB, .SDATAC, .SDATAZ, .FDATA, .FDATAB,.XDATA, .RES, .SRES, .SRESC, .SRESZ, .FRES, or .ORG
• Literal pool generated by the automatic literal pool output function
If an unconditional branch instruction and a delay slot instruction are located immediately
before a loop, or if a .POOL directive is located immediately before a loop, a literal pool may
be automatically generated. To prevent literal pool generation before a loop, use a .NOPOOL
directive immediately after the delay slot instruction.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 277 of 391

• One alignment byte generated by an .ALIGN directive
When an .ALIGN directive is used immediately after an odd address before a loop, onealignment byte may be generated (for example, .ALIGN 4 is specified when the location
counter value is 3). In this case, the contents of the byte before a loop is not an executable
instruction, and an error message is output. If two or more alignment bytes are generated
before a loop, their contents consist of a NOP instruction and the program can be correctly
executed.
Others:• One or more executable or DSP instructions must be located between a REPEAT extended
instruction and the start address. Otherwise, the assembler outputs an error message.
• A REPEAT extended instruction must not be located between another REPEAT extended
instruction and its end address. If REPEAT extended instructions are nested, the assembler
outputs an error message; the first REPEAT is valid, and the other REPEAT instructions are
ignored.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 278 of 391

User’s Guide

Section 1 Executing the Assembler
1.1

Command Line Format

To start the assembler, enter a command line with the following format when the host computer
operating system is in the input wait state.∆> asmsh<input source file> [,<input source file>...][[ ] <command line options> ...]

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) Assembler start command.
(2) Name of input source file. Multiple source files can be specified at the same time.
(3) Command line options, which specify the assembly method in more detail.
CAUTION!
When multiple source files are specified on the command line, the unit of assembly processing
will be the concatenation of the specified files in the specified order.
In this case, the .END directive must appear only in the last file.
Supplement:
The assembler returns the operating system a return code that reports whether or not the assembly
processing terminated normally. The return value indicates the level of the errors occurred asfollows.
Normal termination: 0
Warnings occurred: 0
Errors occurred:
Windows®95 and Windows®NT: 2
UNIX: 1
Fatal error occurred: Windows®95 and Windows®NT: 4
UNIX: 1
The return code can be changed with –ABORT.
Reference:–ABORT→ User's Guide, 2.2.6, "Assembler Execution Command Line Options," –ABORT

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 281 of 391

1.2

File Specification Format

Files handled by the assembler are specified in the following format.
<file name>.[<file format>]

The term "file name" as used in this manual normally refers to both the file name and the fileformat.
Example:(File name)file.src ..... A file with the file name "file" and the file format "src".
prog.obj ..... A file with the file name "prog" and the file format "obj".

The file format is used as an identifier to distinguish the contents of the file. Thus two files withdiffering formats are different files even if the file name is the same.
Example:file.src
file.obj
These file names specify different files.

The assembler handles the following types of file.
• Source file
This is a source program file. If a source program file is specified without the file format, thefile format "src" will be supplied.
• Object file
This is an output destination file for object modules. If an object file is specified without thefile format, the file format obj will be supplied. If an object file is not specified to theassembler, a file with the same name as the source file (the first file) and with the file format"obj" will be used.
• Listing file
This is an output destination file for assemble listings. If a listing file is specified without thefile format, the extension "lis" will be supplied. If a listing file is not specified to theassembler, a file with the same name as the source file (the first file) and with the file format"lis" will be used.
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 282 of 391

1.3

SHCPU Environment Variable

The assembler assembles the program for the CPU specified by the SHCPU environment variable.
The following shows how to specify the environment variable.
For UNIX:• C Shellsetenv SHCPU <target CPU>
• Bourne/Korn Shell
SHCPU=<target CPU>
export SHCPU
For Windows®95 and Windows®NT:
SET SHCPU=<target CPU>
The target CPU can be selected from SH1, SH2, SH2E, SH3, SH3E, SH4, SHDSP, and SH3DSP.
The priority of target CPU specification is in the order of –CPU, .CPU directive, and SHCPU
environment variable.
Note: Be sure to specify this environment variable in uppercase letters.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 283 of 391

Section 2 Command Line Options
2.1

Overview of Command Line Options

Command line options are detailed specifications of the assembly processing. Table 2-1 shows an
overview of the command line options.
Table 2-1

Command Line Options

SectionNumberCommand Line Option

2.2.1

Target CPU specifications
–CPU

2.2.2

2.2.3

2.2.4

2.2.6

Specifies target CPU

Object module specifications–[NO]OBJECT

Controls output of object module–[NO]DEBUG

Controls output of debugging information–ENDIAN

Selects big endian or little endian

Assembly listing specifications–[NO]LIST

Controls output of assembly listing–[NO]SOURCE

Controls output of source program listing–[NO]CROSS_REFERENCE

Controls output of cross-reference listing–[NO]SECTION

Controls output of section information listing–[NO]SHOW

Controls output of part of source program listing–LINESSpecifies the number of lines in assemble listing–COLUMNSSpecifies the number of columns in assemble listing

File inclusion function specifications–INCLUDE

2.2.5

Function

Specifies the include file directory

Conditional assembly specifications–ASSIGNA

Defines integer preprocessor variable–ASSIGNC

Defines character preprocessor variable–DEFINE

Defines replacement character string

Assembler execution specifications–EXPAND

Outputs preprocessor expansion result–ABORT

Changes the error level at which the assembler isabnormally terminatedRev. 4.0, 09/98, page 285 of 391

Table 2-1

Command Line Options (cont)SectionNumberCommand Line Option

2.2.7

Japanese character description specifications

2.2.8

–SJIS

Interprets Japanese characters in source file as shift
JIS code–EUC

Interprets Japanese characters in source file as EUC
code–OUTCODE

Specifies the Japanese code for output to object
code

Automatic literal pool generation specifications–AUTO_LITERAL

2.2.9

Specifies size mode for automatic literal pool
generation

Command line specifications–SUBCOMMAND

2.2.10Function

Inputs command line from a file

Floating-point data specifications–ROUND

Specifies the rounding mode for floating-point data

–DENORMALIZE

Specifies how to handle denormalized numbers infloating-point data

Supplement:
The assemble listing is a listing to which the results of the assembly processing are output, andconsists of a source program listing, a cross-reference listing, and a section information listing.
References: See appendix C, "Assemble Listing Example", for a detailed description of theassemble listing.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 286 of 391

2.2

Command Line Option Reference

2.2.1

Target CPU Command Line Option

This assembler provides the following command line option concerned with the target CPU.

–CPU
This command line option specifies the target CPU.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 287 of 391

–CPU
Target CPU Specification
Syntax–CPU=<target CPU>

Description
1. The –CPU option specifies the target CPU for the source program to be assembled.
2. The following CPUs can be specified.
•

SH1 (for SH-1)•

SH2 (for SH-2)•

SH2E (for SH-2E)•

SH3 (for SH-3)•

SH3E (for SH-3E)•

SH4 (for SH-4)•

SHDSP (for SH-DSP)•

SH3DSP (for SH3-DSP)

Relationship with Assembler Directives
Command Line
OptionAssembler Directive

SHCPU Environment
Variable

Result–CPU(regardless of any
specification)(regardless of any
specification)

Target CPU specified by–CPU(no specification).CPU <target CPU>

(regardless of any
specification)

Target CPU specified by.CPU(no specification)

SHCPU = <target CPU>

Target CPU specified by
SHCPU environment
variable(no specification)

SH1

References: Target CPU→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.1, "Target CPU Assembler Directive," .CPUSHCPU environment variable→ User's Guide, 1.3, "SHCPU Environment Variable"
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 288 of 391

2.2.2

Object Module Command Line Options

This assembler provides the following command line options concerned with object modules.

–OBJECT–NOOBJECT

These command line options control output of an object module.

–DEBUG–NODEBUG

These command line options control output of debug information.

–ENDIAN
This command line option selects big endian or little endian.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 289 of 391

–OBJECT–NOOBJECT

Object Module Output Control
Syntax–OBJECT [= <object output file>]–NOOBJECT
The abbreviated forms are indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –OBJECT option specifies output of an object module.
The –NOOBJECT option specifies no output of an object module.
2. The object output file specifies the output destination for the object module.
3. When the object output file parameter is omitted, the assembler takes the following actions:— If the file format is omitted:
The file format "obj" is supplied.
— If the specification is completely omitted:
The file format "obj" is appended to the name of the input source file (the first specified
source file).
CAUTION!
Do not specify the same file for the input source file and the output object file. If the same file is
specified, the contents of the input source file will be lost.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 290 of 391

–OBJECT–NOOBJECT

Relationship with Assembler Directives
The assembler gives priority to specifications made with command line options.
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result–OBJECT(regardless of any specification)

An object module is output.

–NOOBJECT(regardless of any specification)

An object module is not output.

(no specification).OUTPUT OBJ

An object module is output.

.OUTPUT NOOBJAn object module is not output.

(no specification)

An object module is output.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 291 of 391

–DEBUG–NODEBUG

Debug Information Output Control
Syntax–DEBUG–NODEBUG
The abbreviated forms are indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –DEBUG option specifies output of debug information.
The –NODEBUG option specifies no output of debug information.
2. The –DEBUG and –NODEBUG options are only valid in cases where an object module isbeing output.
3. To output debug information, the assembler automatically generates a directory with the name"dwfinf" under the directory to which the object file is output, and outputs a supplement
debugging information (ELF/DWARF supplement information) file whose file name is thesame as the object file and whose file format is "dwi".
References: Object module output→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.6, "Object Module Assembler Directives",.OUTPUT→ User's Guide, 2.2.2, "Object Module Command Line Options",–OBJECT –NOOBJECT
Relationship with Assembler Directives
The assembler gives priority to specifications made with command line options.
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result–DEBUG(regardless of any specification)

Debug information is output.

–NODEBUG(regardless of any specification)

Debug information is not output.

(no specification).OUTPUT DBG

Debug information is output.

.OUTPUT NODBG

Debug information is not output.

(no specification)

Debug information is not output.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 292 of 391

-DEBUG-NODEBUG

Supplement:
Debug information is required when debugging a program using the debugger or the emulator,
and is part of the object module. Debug information includes information about source statement
lines and information about symbols.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 293 of 391

–ENDIAN
Big Endian or Little Endian Selection
Syntax–ENDIAN[=<endian>]Endian:{BIG|LITTLE}
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –ENDIAN option selects big endian or little endian for the target CPU.
2. The default is big endian.
Relationship with Assembler Directives
The assembler gives priority to specifications made with command line options.
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result–ENDIAN=BIG(regardless of any specification)

Assembles in big endian–ENDIAN=LITTLE(regardless of any specification)

Assembles in little endian(no specification).ENDIAN BIG

Assembles in big endian.ENDIAN LITTLE

Assembles in little endian(no specification)

Assembles in big endian

Reference:.ENDIAN→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.6, "Object Module Assembler Directives," .ENDIAN

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 294 of 391

2.2.3

Assembly Listing Command Line Options

This assembler provides the following command line options concerned with the assemble listing.

–LIST–NOLIST

These command line options control output of an assemble listing.

–SOURCE–NOSOURCE

These command line options control output of a source program listing.

–CROSS_REFERENCE–NOCROSS_REFERENCE

These command line options control output of a cross-reference listing.

–SECTION–NOSECTION

These command line options control output of a section information listing.

–SHOW–NOSHOW

These command line options control output of the source program listing.

–LINESThis command line option sets the number of lines in the assemble listing.

–COLUMNSThis command line option sets the number of columns in the assemble listing.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 295 of 391

–LIST–NOLIST

Assemble Listing Output Control
Syntax–LIST [ =<listing output file> ]–NOLIST
The abbreviated forms are indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –LIST option specifies output of an assemble listing.
The –NOLIST option specifies no output of an assemble listing.
2. The listing output file specifies the output destination file for the assemble listing.
3. When the listing output file parameter is omitted, the assembler takes the following actions:— If the file format is omitted:
The file format "lis" is supplied.
— If the specification is completely omitted:
The file format "lis" is appended to the name of the input source file (the first specified
source file).
CAUTION!
Do not specify the same file for the input source file and the output object file. If the same file is
specified, the contents of the input source file will be lost.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 296 of 391

–LIST–NOLIST

Relationship with Assembler Directives
The assembler gives priority to specifications made with command line options.
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result–LIST(regardless of any specification)

An assemble listing is output.

–NOLIST(regardless of any specification)

An assemble listing is not output.

(no specification).PRINT LIST

An assemble listing is output.

.PRINT NOLISTAn assemble listing is not output.

(no specification)

An assemble listing is not output.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 297 of 391

–SOURCE–NOSOURCE

Source Program Listing Output Control
Syntax–SOURCE–NOSOURCE
The abbreviated forms are indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –SOURCE option specifies output of a source program listing to the assemble listing.
The –NOSOURCE option specifies no output of a source program listing to the assemble
listing.
2. The –SOURCE and –NOSOURCE options are only valid in cases where an assemble listing isbeing output.
References: Assemble listing output→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.7, "Assemble Listing Assembler Directives",.PRINT→ User's Guide, 2.2.3, "Assemble Listing Command Line Options",–LIST –NOLIST

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 298 of 391

–SOURCE–NOSOURCE

Relationship with Assembler Directives
The assembler gives priority to specifications made with command line options.
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result (When an Assemble
Listing Is Output)–SOURCE(regardless of any specification)

A source program listing is output.

–NOSOURCE(regardless of any specification)

A source program listing is not
output.

(no specification).PRINT SRC

A source program listing is output.

.PRINT NOSRC

A source program listing is not
output.

(no specification)

A source program listing is output.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 299 of 391

–CROSS_REFERENCE–NOCROSS_REFERENCE

Cross-Reference Listing Output Control
Syntax–CROSS_REFERENCE–NOCROSS_REFERENCE
The abbreviated forms are indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –CROSS_REFERENCE option specifies output of a cross-reference listing to theassemble listing.
The –NOCROSS_REFERENCE option specifies no output of a cross-reference listing to theassemble listing.
2. The –CROSS_REFERENCE and –NOCROSS_REFERENCE options are only valid in cases
where an assemble listing is being output.
References: Assemble listing output→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.7, "Assemble Listing Assembler Directives",.PRINT→ User's Guide, 2.2.3, "Assemble Listing Command Line Options",–LIST –NOLIST

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 300 of 391

–CROSS_REFERENCE –NOCROSS_REFERENCE

Relationship with Assembler Directives
The assembler gives priority to specifications made with command line options.
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result (When an Assemble
Listing Is Output)–CROSS_REFERENCE(regardless of any specification)

A cross-reference listing is output.

–NOCROSS_REFERENCE(regardless of any specification)

A cross-reference listing is not
output.

(no specification).PRINT CREF

A cross-reference listing is output.

.PRINT NOCREF

A cross-reference listing is not
output.

(no specification)

A cross-reference listing is output.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 301 of 391

–SECTION–NOSECTION

Section Information Listing Output Control
Syntax–SECTION–NOSECTION
The abbreviated forms are indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –SECTION option specifies output of a section information listing to the assemble listing.
The –NOSECTION option specifies no output of a section information listing to the assemble
listing.
2. The –SECTION and –NOSECTION options are only valid in cases where an assemble listing
is being output.
References: Assemble listing output→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.7, "Assemble Listing Assembler Directives",.PRINT→ User's Guide, 2.2.3, "Assemble Listing Command Line Options",–LIST –NOLIST

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 302 of 391

–SECTION–NOSECTION

Relationship with Assembler Directives
The assembler gives priority to specifications made with command line options.
Result (When an Assemble
Listing Is Output)

Command Line Option

Assembler Directive–SECTION(regardless of any specification)

A section information listing is
output.

–NOSECTION(regardless of any specification)

A section information listing is not
output.

(no specification).PRINT SCT

A section information listing is
output.

.PRINT NOSCTA section information listing is not
output.

(no specification)

A section information listing is
output.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 303 of 391

–SHOW–NOSHOW

Source Program Listing Output Control
Syntax<UNIX>–SHOW [= <output type>[,<output type> ...]]–NOSHOW [= <output type>[,<output type> ...]]
ÆÆ

<Windows 95 and Windows NT>–SHOW [=(<output type>[,<output type> ...])]–NOSHOW [=(<output type>[,<output type> ...])]
When only one output type is specified, the parentheses can be omitted.
Output type:{CONDITIONALS|DEFINITIONS|CALLS|EXPANSIONS|CODE}
The abbreviated forms are indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –SHOW option specifies output of preprocessor function source statements and object
code lines in the source program listing.
The –NOSHOW option suppresses output of specified preprocessor function source statements
and object code display lines in the source program listing.
2. The items specified by output types will be output or suppressed depending on the option.
When no output type is specified, all items will be output or suppressed.
–SHOW:
Output–NOSHOW: No output (suppress)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 304 of 391

–SHOW–NOSHOW

3. The following output types can be specified:
Output Type

ObjectDescription

CONDITIONALS

Failed condition

Condition-failed .AIF or .AIFDEF statements

DEFINITIONSDefinition

Macro definition parts,.AREPEAT and .AWHILE definition parts,.INCLUDE directive statements.ASSIGNA and .ASSSIGNC directive statements

CALLS

Call

Macro call statements,.AIF, .AIFDEF, and .AENDI directive statements

EXPANSIONS

Expansion

Macro expansion statements.AREPEAT and .AWHILE expansion statements

CODE

Object code lines

The object code lines exceeding the source
statement lines

References: Source program listing output→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.7, "Assemble Listing Assembler Directives”,.PRINT→ User's Guide, 2.2.3, "Assemble Listing Command Line Options”, –LIST–NOLIST –SOURCE –NOSOURCE
Relationship with Assembler Directives
The assembler gives priority to specifications made with command line options.
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result–SHOW=<output type>(regardless of any specification)

The object code is output.

–NOSHOW=<output type> (regardless of any specification)

The object code is not output.

(no specification)

The object code is output.

.LIST <output type> (output).LIST <output type> (suppress)

The object code is not output.

(no specification)

The object code is output.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 305 of 391

–LINES
Setting of the Number of Lines in the Assemble Listing
Syntax–LINES=<line count>
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –LINES option sets the number of lines on a single page of the assemble listing. The
range of valid values for the line count is from 20 to 255.
2. The –LINES option is only valid in cases where an assemble listing is being output.
References: Assemble listing output→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.7, "Assemble Listing Assembler Directives",.PRINT→ User's Guide, 2.2.3, "Assemble Listing Command Line Options",–LIST –NOLIST
Relationship with Assembler Directives
The assembler gives priority to specifications made with command line options.
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result–LINES=<line count>(regardless of any specification)

The number of lines on a page is
given by –LINES.

(no specification).FORM LIN=<line count>

The number of lines on a page is
given by .FORM.

(no specification)

The number of lines on a page is
60 lines.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 306 of 391

–COLUMNS
Setting of the Number of Columns in the Assemble Listing
Syntax–COLUMNS=<column count>
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –COLUMNS option sets the number of columns in a single line of the assemble listing.
The range of valid values for the column count is from 79 to 255.
2. The –COLUMNS option is only valid in cases where an assemble listing is being output.
References: Assemble listing output→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.7, "Assemble Listing Assembler Directives",.PRINT→ User's Guide, 2.2.3, "Assemble Listing Command Line Options",–LIST –NOLIST
Relationship with Assembler Directives
The assembler gives priority to specifications made with command line options.
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result–COLUMNS=<column count>(regardless of any specification)

The number of columns in a line
is given by –COLUMNS.

(no specification).FORM COL=<column count>

The number of columns in a line
is given by .FORM.

(no specification)

The number of columns in a line
is 132 columns.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 307 of 391

2.2.4File Inclusion Function Command Line Option

This assembler provides the following command line option concerned with the file inclusion
function.

–INCLUDE
This command line option specifies the include file directory.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 308 of 391

–INCLUDE
Include File Directory Specification
Syntax–INCLUDE=<directory name>[,<directory name...]
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –INCLUDE option specifies the include file directory.
2. The directory name depends on the naming rule of the host machine used.
3. As many directory name as can be input in one command line can be specified.
4. The current directory is searched, and then the directories specified by the –INCLUDE aresearched in the specified order.
Relationship with Assembler Directives
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result–INCLUDE(regardless of any specification)(1) Directory specified by.INCLUDE(2) Directory specified by–INCLUDE*(no specification).INCLUDE <file name>

Directory specified by .INCLUDE

Note: The directory specified by the –INCLUDE option is added before that specified by.INCLUDE.

Noteasmsh aaa.mar -include=/usr/tmp,/tmp(UNIX)(.INCLUDE "file.h" is specified in aaa.mar.)
The current directory, /usr/tmp, and /tmp are searched for file.h in that order.
Reference: .INCLUDE→ Programmer's Guide, 6, "File Inclusion Function"Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 309 of 391

2.2.5

Conditional Assembly Command Line Options

This assembler provides the following command line options concerned with conditional
assembly.

–ASSIGNA
This command line option defines integer preprocessor variable.

–ASSIGNC
This command line option defines character preprocessor variable.

–DEFINE
This command line option defines replacement character string.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 310 of 391

–ASSIGNA
Integer Preprocessor Variable Definition
Syntax–ASSIGNA=<preprocessor variable>=<integer constant>[,<preprocessor variable>=<integer constant>...]
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –ASSIGNA option sets an integer constant to a preprocessor variable.
2. The naming rule of preprocessor variables is the same as that of symbols.
3. An integer constant is specified by combining the radix (B', Q', D', or H') and a value. If theradix is omitted, the value is assumed to be decimal.
4. An integer constant must be within the range from –2,147,483,648 to 4,294,967,295. To
specify a negative value, use a radix other than decimal.
Relationship with Assembler Directives
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result–ASSIGNA.ASSIGNA*

Value specified by –ASSIGNA(no specification)

Value specified by –ASSIGNA.ASSIGNA

Value specified by .ASSIGNA(no specification)

Note: When a value is assigned to a preprocessor variable by the –ASSIGNA option, thedefinition of the preprocessor variable by .ASSIGNA is invalidated.

Note
When the host machine uses UNIX as the OS, specify a backslash (\) before the apostrophe (') of
the radix. If a preprocessor variable includes a dollar mark ($), specify a backslash (\) before thedollar mark.
Example:asmsh

aaa.mar–assigna=_\$=H\'FF(UNIX)

Value H'FF is assigned to preprocessor variable _$. All references ( \&_$) to preprocessor
variable _$ in the source program are set to H'FF.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 311 of 391

-ASSIGNA

Reference: .ASSIGNA→ Programmer's Guide, 7.2, "Conditional Assembly Directive," .ASSIGNA

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 312 of 391

–ASSIGNC
Character Preprocessor Variable Definition
Syntax–ASSIGNC=<preprocessor variable>="<character string>"[,<preprocessor variable>="<character string>"...]
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –ASSIGNC option sets a character string to a preprocessor variable.
2. The naming rule of preprocessor variables is the same as that of symbols.
3. A character string must be enclosed with double-quotation marks (").
4. Up to 255 characters (bytes) can be specified for a character string.
Relationship with Assembler Directives
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result–ASSIGNC.ASSIGNC directive*

Character string specified by –ASSIGNC(no specification)

Character string specified by –ASSIGNC.ASSIGNC directive

Character string specified by .ASSIGNC(no specification)

Note: When a character string is assigned to a preprocessor variable by the –ASSIGNC option,
the definition of the preprocessor variable by .ASSIGNC is invalidated.

Note
To specify the following characters in a character string when the host machine uses UNIX as theOS, specify a backslash (\) before the characters. To specify character strings before and after thefollowing characters, enclose the character strings with double-quotation marks (").
• Exclamation mark (!)• Double-quotation mark (")• Dollar mark ($)• Back quotation mark (`)

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 313 of 391

-ASSIGNC

asmsh aaa.mar -assignc=_\$="ON"\!"OFF"(UNIX)

Character string ON!OFF is assigned to preprocessor variable _$. All references (\&_$) to
preprocessor variable _$ in the source program are set to ON!OFF.
Reference: .ASSIGNC→ Programmer's Guide, 7.2, "Conditional Assembly Directive," .ASSIGNC

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 314 of 391

–DEFINE
Replacement Character String Definition
Syntax–DEFINE=<replacement symbol>="<character string>"[,<replacement symbol>="<character string>"...]
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –DEFINE option defines that the specified symbol is replaced with the corresponding
character string by the preprocessor.
2. Differences between –DEFINE and –ASSIGNC are the same as those between .DEFINE and.ASSIGNC.
Relationship with Assembler Directives
Command Line Option

Assembler Directive

Result–DEFINE.DEFINE directive*

Character string specified by –DEFINE(no specification)

Character string specified by –DEFINE.DEFINE directive

Character string specified by .DEFINE(no specification)

Note: When a character string is assigned to a replacement symbol by the –DEFINE option, thedefinition of the replacement symbol by .DEFINE is invalidated.

Reference: .DEFINE→ Programmer's Guide, 7.2, "Conditional Assembly Directive," .DEFINE

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 315 of 391

2.2.6Assembler Execution Command Line Option

This assembler provides the following command line options concerned with assembler execution.

–EXPAND
This command line option outputs preprocessor expansion result.

–ABORT
This command line option changes the error level at which the assembler is abnormallyterminated.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 316 of 391

–EXPAND
Preprocessor Expansion Result Output
Syntax–EXPAND[=<output file name>]
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –EXPAND option outputs an assembler source file for which macro expansion,
conditional assembly, and file inclusion have been performed.
2. When this option is specified, no object will be generated.
3. When the output file parameter is omitted, the assembler takes the following actions:— If the file format is omitted:
The file format "exp" is used.
— If the specification is completely omitted:
The file format "exp" is appended to the name of the input source file (the first specified
source file).
4. Do not specify the same file name for the input and output files.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 317 of 391

–ABORT
Change of Error Level at Which the Assembler Is Abnormally TerminatedSyntax–ABORT=<error level>
Error level:{WARNING|ERROR}
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –ABORT option specifies the error level and changes the return value to the OS
depending on the assembly result.
2. The return value to the OS is as follows:
Return Value to OS when Option Specified
Number of Cases

ABORT=WARNINGABORT=ERROR*

Warning

Error

Fatal Error

Windows®95,
Windows®NT

UNIX

Windows®95,
Windows®NT

UNIX

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1 or more

0

0

2

1

0

0

—

1 or more

0

2

1

2

1

—

—

1 or more

4

1

4

1

Note: The underline indicates the default option setting.

3. When the return value to the OS becomes 1 or larger, the object module is not output.
4. The –ABORT option is valid only when the object module output is specified.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 318 of 391

2.2.7

Japanese Character Description Command Line Options

This assembler provides the following command line options concerned with Japanese characters
description in source files.

–SJIS
This command line option interprets Japanese kanji characters in source files as shift JIS
code.

–EUC
This command line option interprets Japanese kanji characters in source files as EUC code.

–OUTCODEThis command line option specifies the Japanese kanji code for output to object file.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 319 of 391

–SJISInterpretation of Japanese Characters as Shift JIS Code
Syntax–SJIS

Description
1. The –SJIS option enables Japanese characters to be written in character strings and comments.
SJIS:

Japanese characters in character strings and comments are interpreted as
shift JIS code.

No specification: Japanese characters in character strings and comments are interpreted as
Japanese code specified by the host machine.
2. Do not specify this option together with the –EUC option.
Reference: Shift JIS code
→ Programmer's Guide, 1.4.2 "Character Constants"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 320 of 391

–EUCInterpretation of Japanese Characters as EUC Code
Syntax–EUC

Description
1. The –EUC option enables Japanese characters to be written in character strings and comments.
EUC:

Japanese characters in character strings and comments are interpreted EUC
code.

No specification: Japanese characters in character strings and comments are interpreted as
Japanese code specified by the host machine.
2. Do not specify this option together with the –SJIS option.
Reference: EUC code
→ Programmer's Guide, 1.4.2 "Character Constants"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 321 of 391

–OUTCODE
Specification of Japanese Code for Output to Object File
Syntax–OUTCODE=<Japanese code><Japanese code>:{SJIS|EUC}
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –OUTCODE option converts Japanese characters in the source file to the specified
Japanese kanji code for output to the object file.
2. The Japanese code output to the object file depends on the –OUTCODE specification and thecode (–SJIS or –EUC) in the source file as follows:–OUTCODE
Specification

Japanese Code in Source File
–SJIS

–EUC

No Specification

SJIS

Shift JIS code

Shift JIS code

Shift JIS code

EUC

EUC code

EUC code

EUC code

No specification

Shift JIS code

EUC code

Default code

Default code is as follows.
Host Machine

Default CodeSPARC station

EUC code

HP9000/700 series

Shift JIS code

PC9800 series
IBM PC and its compatible machine

Shift JIS code

Reference: Japanese code in the source file
→ User's Guide, 2.2.7 "Japanese Character Description Command Line Options"–SJIS→ User's Guide, 2.2.7 "Japanese Character Description Command Line Options"–EUC

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 322 of 391

2.2.8Automatic Literal Pool Generation Command Line Option

This assembler provides the following command line option concerned with automatic literal pool
generation.

–AUTO_LITERALThis command line option specifies the size mode for automatic literal pool generation.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 323 of 391

–AUTO_LITERAL
Size Mode Specification for Automatic Literal Pool Generation
Syntax–AUTO_LITERALThe abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –AUTO_LITERAL option specifies the size mode for automatic literal pool generation.
— When this command line option is specified, automatic literal pool generation is performedin size selection mode, and the assembler checks the imm value in the data move
instruction without operation size specification (MOV #imm,Rn) and automaticallygenerates a literal pool if necessary.
— When this option is not specified, automatic literal pool generation is performed in size
specification mode, and the data move instruction without size specification is handled as a
1-byte data move instruction.
2. In the size selection mode, the imm value in the data move instruction without operation size
specification is handled as a signed value. Therefore, a value within the range from
H'00000080 to H'000000FF (128 to 255) is regarded as word-size data.
Selected Size or Error
Size Selection
Mode

Size Specification
Mode

H'80000000 to H'FFFF7FFF (–2,147,483,648 to–32,769)

Long word

Warning 835

H'FFFF8000 to H'FFFFFF7F (–32,768 to –129)

Word

Warning 835

H'FFFFFF80 to H'0000007F (–128 to 127)

Byte

Byte

H'00000080 to H'000000FF (128 to 255)

Word

Byte

H'00000100 to H'00007FFF (256 to 32,767)

Word

Warning 835

H'00008000 to H'7FFFFFFF (32,768 to
2,147,483,647)

Long word

Warning 835

imm Value Range*

Note: The value in parentheses ( ) is in decimal.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 324 of 391

–AUTO_LITERAL

Reference: Size selection mode
Size specification mode
→ Programmer's Guide, 9.3 "Size Mode for Automatic Literal Pool Generation"Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 325 of 391

2.2.9Command Line Input Command Line Option

This assembler provides the following command line option concerned with command line input.

–SUBCOMMAND
This command line option inputs command line specifications from a file.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 326 of 391

–SUBCOMMAND
Command Line Specification Input from File
Syntax–SUBCOMMAND=<subcommand file name>
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –SUBCOMMAND option inputs command line specifications from a file.
2. Specify input file names and command line options in the subcommand file in the same order
as for normal command line specifications.
3. Only one input file name or one command line option can be specified in one line in thesubcommand file.
4. This option must be specified at the end of a command line. The remaining files and options
are read from the specified subcommand file.
5. This option must not be specified in a subcommand file.
Example:asmsh aaa.src -subcommand=aaa.sub

The subcommand file contents are expanded to a command line and assembled.
aaa.sub contents
bbb.src-list-noobj

The above command line and file aaa.sub are expanded as follows:
asmsh aaa.src,bbb.src -list -noobj

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 327 of 391

-SUBCOMMAND

Notes
1. One line of a subcommand file can include a maximum of 300 bytes.
2. One subcommand file can include a maximum of 32,767 bytes.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 328 of 391

2.2.10

Floating-Point Data Command Line Options

This assembler provides the following command line options concerned with floating-point data.

–ROUND
This command line option specifies the rounding mode for floating-point data.

–DENORMALIZE
This command line option specifies how to handle denormalized numbers in floating-point
data.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 329 of 391

–ROUND
Specification of Floating-Point Data Rounding Mode
Syntax–ROUND=<rounding mode><rounding mode>:{NEAREST|ZERO}
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –ROUND option specifies the rounding mode used when converting constants in floatingpoint data assembler directives into object codes.
2. The following two rounding modes can be selected.
— round to NEAREST even (NEAREST)— round to ZERO (ZERO)
3. When the –ROUND option is not specified, the rounding mode depends on the CPU type asfollows:
CPU Type

Rounding Mode

SH-1

round to NEAREST even

SH-2

round to NEAREST even

SH-2E

round to ZERO

SH-3

round to NEAREST even

SH-3E

round to ZERO

SH-4

round to ZEROSH-DSP

round to NEAREST even

SH3-DSP

round to NEAREST even

CAUTION!
When the CPU type is SH-2E or SH-3E and round to NEAREST even is selected as the rounding
mode, warning number 818 occurs at the first floating-point data assembler directive in the source
program, and object code is output in the selected "round to NEAREST even" rounding mode.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 330 of 391

–ROUND

Reference: Rounding mode
→ Programmer's Guide, 1.4.3 "Floating-Point Constants"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 331 of 391

–DENORMALIZE
Specification of Handling Denormalized Numbers in Floating-Point Data
Syntax–DENORMALIZE=<selection type><selection type>:{ON|OFF}
The abbreviated form is indicated by bold face.

Description
1. The –DENORMALIZE option specifies whether to handle the denormalized numbers infloating-point data assembler directives as valid values.
2. The object code differs when denormalized numbers are specified as valid values (ON) andinvalid values (OFF).
— Valid:

Warning number 842 occurs and the object code is output.

— Invalid: Warning number 841 occurs and zero is output for the object code.
3. When the –DENORMALIZE option is not specified, whether the denormalized numbers arevalid depends on the CPU type as follows:
CPU Type

Valid/Invalid

SH-1

Valid (ON)

SH-2

Valid (ON)

SH-2E

Invalid (OFF)SH-3

Valid (ON)

SH-3E

Invalid (OFF)SH-4

Invalid (OFF)SH-DSP

Valid (ON)

SH3-DSP

Valid (ON)Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 332 of 391

–DENORMALIZE

CAUTION!
When the CPU type is SH-2E or SH-3E and denormalized numbers are specified as valid, warning
number 818 occurs at the first floating-point data assembler directive in the source program, andobject code is output with the denormalized numbers handled as valid values as specified.
Reference: Denormalized numbers→ Programmer's Guide, 1.4.3 "Floating-Point Constants"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 333 of 391

Appendix

Appendix A Limitations and Notes on Programming
Table A-1

Limitations and Notes on Programming

No.

Item

Limitation

1

Character types

ASCII characters, shift JIS code, EUC code2

Upper/lowercase letter
distinction

Symbols (including section names)
Object module names

Distinguished

Reserved words
Executable instruction mnemonics
DSP instruction mnemonics
Assembler directive mnemonics
Operation sizes
Integer constant radixes

Not
distinguished3Line length

Up to 255 bytes

4

Program length (in lines)

Up to 65,535 lines

5

Character constants

Up to 4 characters

6

Symbol length

Up to 251 characters

7

Number of symbols

Up to 65,535 symbols

8

Number of import symbols

Up to 65,535 symbols

9

Number of export symbols

Up to 65,535 symbols

10

Section size

Up to H'FFFFFFFF bytes

11

Number of sections

Up to 65,535 sections

12

Number of macro generation
numbers

Up to 100,000 numbers

13

Number of literals

Up to 100,000 literals

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 337 of 391

Appendix B Sample ProgramThis appendix presents a sample program written for this assembler.

B.1

Sample Program Specifications

Functional Specification
Macros and subroutines for addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of fixed-point
data in the following format:<parameter 1> OP <parameter 2> → result
OP: +, –, ×, ÷Note: Operation results are rounded off. Neither underflow nor overflow is checked.
Data Format
RegisterInteger part
Sign bit

Fraction part
Decimal point

The location of the decimal point is set in preprocessor variable POINT as the number of bitsfrom the MSB.
Inputs and Outputs
Inputs: Set parameter 1 in register Parm1.
Set parameter 2 in register Parm2.
For addition and subtraction, parameters 1 and 2 can be specified as macro parameters.
Output: The result is stored in register Parm1.
Macro and Subroutine Usage
Addition (+):
Macro call FIX_ADD [parameter 1], [parameter 2]
Subtraction (–): Macro call FIX_SUB [parameter 1], [parameter 2]
Multiplication (×): Subroutine call FIX_MULDivision(÷):
Subroutine call FIX_DIVRegisters to be Used
Define the following registers with the .REG directive:
Parm1, Parm2, WORK1, WORK2, WORK3, WORK4

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 338 of 391

B.2

Coding Example.MACRO
ADD.ENDM

FIX_ADD Rs=Parm2, Rd=Parm1\Rs,\Rd.MACROSUB.ENDM

FIX_SUB Rs=Parm2,Rd=Parm1\Rs,\Rd

FIX_MUL:

MUL01

MUL02

MUL03

DIV0S
Parm1,Parm2
MOVT
WORK1
CMP/PZ Parm1
BT
MUL01
NEG
Parm1,Parm1
CMP/PZ Parm2
BT
MUL02
NEG
Parm2,Parm2
MULU
Parm1,Parm2
SWAP.W Parm1,Parm1
STS
MACL,WORK2
MULU
Parm1,Parm2
SWAP.W Parm1,Parm1
SWAP.W Parm2,Parm2STS
MACL,WORK3
MULU
Parm1,Parm2
SWAP.W Parm1,Parm1
STS
MACL,WORK4
MULU
Parm1,Parm2
CLRT
STS
MACL,Parm1
MOV
WORK3,Parm2
SHLR16 WORK3
SHLL16 Parm2
ADDC
Parm2,WORK2
ADDC
WORK3,Parm1
MOV
WORK4,Parm2
SHLR16 WORK4
SHLL16 Parm2
ADDC
WORK4,Parm1.AREPEAT \&POINT
SHLL
Parm2
ROTCL
Parm1
.AENDR
SHLR
WORK1
BF
MUL03
NEG
Parm1,Parm1
RTS
NOP

;
; Stores the sign of the result in WORK1.
;;
If (Parm1 < 0), Parm1 = Parm1;;;
If (Parm2 < 0), Parm2 = Parm2;; Parm1 (low) * Parm2 (low);;; Parm1 (high) * Parm2 (low);;;; Parm1 (low) * Parm2 (high);;; Parm1 (high) * Parm2( high)
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Sums 16-bit multiplication results.
;
;
;
;
;
;
Corrects decimal point location.
;;;;
Adds the sign.
;(Continued on following page.)Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 339 of 391

FIX_DIV:
MOV#0,WORK1
DIV0S
WORK1,Parm1
SUBC
WORK1,Parm1.AREPEAT \&POINT
SHAR
Parm1
ROTCR
WORK1
.AENDR
DIV0S
Parm2,Parm1.AREPEAT 32
ROTCL
WORK1
DIV1
Parm2,Parm1.AENDR
ROTCL
WORK1
MOV
#0,Parm1
ADDC
Parm1,WORK1
MOV
WORK1,Parm1
RTS
NOP

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 340 of 391

;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;

If dividend is a negative value,
converts to 1's complement.
Corrects decimal point location.

Parm1:WORK1/Parm2 → WORK1

Converts to 2's complement.

Appendix C Assemble Listing Output Example
The assemble listing shows the result of the assemble processing. The assemble listing consists ofa source program listing, a cross-reference listing, and a section information listing.
This appendix describes the content and output format of the assemble listing using the assemblyof the source program shown below as an example. This uses the sample program shown inappendix B to calculate the following:
1.5 × 2.25 + 3 ÷ 5
POINT
Parm1
Parm2
WORK1
WORK2
WORK3
WORK4

.ASSIGNA 16
.REG
(R0)
.REG
(R1)
.REG
(R2)
.REG
(R3)
.REG
(R4)
.REG
(R5)
.SECTION SAMPLE,CODE,ALIGN=4.INCLUDE "appendix B"

a
b
c
d

.REG
.REG
.REG
.REG

(R8)
(R9)
(R10)
(R11)

STS
MOV.L
MOV.L
MOV.L
MOV.L

PR,@-SP#H'00018000,a#H'00024000,b#H'00030000,c#H'00050000,d

start

MOV
a,Parm1
MOVb,Parm2
BSR
FIX_MUL
NOP
MOV
Parm1,aMOVc,Parm1
MOVd,Parm2
BSR
FIX_DIVNOP
FIX_ADD a
MOV
Parm1,aLDS@SP+,PR
RTS
NOP
.END

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 341 of 391

C.1

Source Program Listing

The source program listing lists information related to the source statements, including the line
number and the corresponding object code.
Figure C-1 shows an example of a source program listing.
*** SuperH RISC engine ASSEMBLER Ver. 4.0 ***PROGRAM NAME =
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
20
21
22
23
24
25
(1)
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

~
00000000
00000000 2107
00000002 0229
00000004 4011
00000006 8900
00000008 600B
(2)

~

(3)

39

Parm1,Parm2
WORK1
Parm1
MUL01
Parm1,Parm1(6)***** BEGIN-POOL *****
BRA TO END-POOLNOP
DATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 217
DATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 218
DATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 219
DATA FOR SOURCE-LINE 220***** END-POOL *****
.END

0
0

Figure C-1 Source Program Listing Output Example

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 342 of 391(7).HEADING """SAMPLE""".ASSIGNA 16
.REG
(R0)
.REG
(R1)
.REG
(R2)
.REG
(R3)
.REG
(R4)
.REG
(R5)

9 I1 FIX_MUL:
10 I1
DIV0S
11 I1
MOVT
12 I1
CMP/PZ
13 I1
BT
14 I1
NEG
(4) (5)00000180 A008
00000182 0009
00000184 00018000
00000188 00024000
0000018C 00030000
00000190 00050000****TOTAL ERRORS****TOTAL WARNINGS
(9)

POINT
Parm1
Parm2
WORK1
WORK2
WORK3
WORK4

01/12/98 19:52:40"SAMPLE"

;
;
;
;
;

if (Parm1(8)

(1) Line numbers (in decimal)(2) The value of the location counter (in hexadecimal)(3) The object code (in hexadecimal). The size of the reserved area in bytes is listed for areas
reserved with the .RES, .SRES, .SRESC, .SRESZ, and .FRES assembler directives.
(4) Source line numbers (in decimal)(5) Expansion type. Whether the statement is expanded by file inclusion, conditional assembly
function, or macro function is listed.
In: File inclusion (n indicates the nest level).
C: Satisfied conditional assembly, performed iterated expansion, or satisfied conditional
iterated expansion
M: Macro expansion(6) The source statements(7) The header setup with the .HEADING assembler directive.
(8) The literal pool
(9) The total number of errors and warnings. Error messages are listed on the line following thesource statement that caused the error.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 343 of 391

C.2

Cross-Reference Listing

The cross-reference listing lists information relating to symbols, including the attribute and thevalue.
Figure C-2 shows an example of a cross-reference listing.
*** SuperH RISC engine ASSEMBLER Ver. 4.0 ***01/12/98 19:52:40*** CROSS REFERENCE LISTNAMESECTION

ATTR VALUEFIX_DIV
FIX_MUL
MAN03
MUL01
MUL02
Parm1

SAMPLESAMPLE

00000088
00000000
UDEF 00000000
0000000A
00000010
REG

SAMPLESAMPLE

Parm2

REG

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

SEQUENCE
94*
20*
89
24
27
3*
37
69
96
122
150
174
198
4*
44
70
144
168
(5)

229
224
26*
29*
21
37
71
97
124
152
176
200
21
45
72
146
170

23
39
73
102
126
154
178
202
26
47
74
148
172

25
41
75
104
128
156
180
204
28
49
76
150
174

Figure C-2 Cross-Reference Listing Output Example(1) The symbol name(2) The name of the section that includes the symbol (first eight characters)(3) The symbol attribute
EXPT:
Export symbol
IMPT:
Import symbol
SCT:
Section name
REG:
Symbol defined with the .REG assembler directive
FREG:
Symbol defined with the .FREG assembler directive
ASGN:
Symbol defined with the .ASSIGN assembler directive
EQU:
Symbol defined with the .EQU assembler directive
MDEF:
Symbol defined two or more times
UDEF:
Undefined symbol
No symbol attribute (blank): A symbol other than those listed above(4) The value of symbol (in hexadecimal)(5) The list line numbers (in decimal) of the source statements where the symbol is defined orreferenced. The line number marked with an asterisk is the line where the symbol is defined.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 344 of 391

C.3

Section Information Listing

The section information listing lists information related to the sections in a program, including thesection type and section size.
Figure C-3 shows an example of a section information listing.
*** SuperH RISC engine ASSEMBLER Ver. 4.0 ***01/12/98 19:52:40*** SECTION DATA LISTSECTIONATTRIBUTESIZE

SAMPLE(1)

REL-CODE(2)000000194
(3)

START

(4)

Figure C-3 Section Information Listing Output Example(1) The section name(2) The section type
REL:

Relative address sectionABS:

Absolute address section

CODE:

Code section

DATA:

Data section

COMMON: Common section
STACK:

Stack section

DUMMY:

Dummy section(3) The section size (in hexadecimal, byte units)(4) The start address of absolute address sections

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 345 of 391

Appendix D Error Messages
D.1

Error Types(1) Command Errors
These are errors related to the command line that starts the assembler. These errors can occur, forexample, in cases where there are errors in the source file or command line option specifications.
The assembler outputs the error message to standard error output (usually the display).*1 The
format of these messages is as follows:*2" ", line <line number>:<error number> (E) <message>

Example:" ", line 0: 10(E) NO INPUT FILE SPECIFIED®

Notes: 1. The assembler outputs the message to standard output when Windows 95 or®
Windows NT is used.
®

®

2. The format is as follows when Windows 95 or Windows NT is used:(<line number>): <error number>(E)<message>

Example:(0): 10(E) NO INPUT FILE SPECIFIED(2) Source Program Errors
These are syntax errors in the source program.
The assembler outputs the error message to standard output (usually the display) or the source
program listing. (If a source program listing is output during assembly, these messages are not
output to standard output.)*1

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 346 of 391

The format of these messages is as follows:*2"<source file name>",line <line number>: <error number>(E)<message>"<source file name>",line <line number>: <error number>(W)<message>

Example:"PROG.SRC",line 25: 300(E) ILLEGAL MNEMONIC"PROG.SRC",line 33: 811(W) ILLEGAL SYMBOL DEFINITION

Notes: 1. The assembler outputs the message to standard output or the source program listing
when Windows®95 or Windows®NT is used.
2. The format is as follows when Windows®95 or Windows®NT is used:<source file name>(<line number>): <error number>(E)<message><source file name>(<line number>): <error number>(W)<message>

Example:PROG.SRC(25): 300(E) ILLEGAL MNEMONIC
PROG.SRC(33): 811(W) ILLEGAL SYMBOL DEFINITION

The source program error numbers are classified as follows:
100 to 199: General source program syntax errors
200 to 299: Errors in symbols
300 to 349: Errors in operations and/or operands
350 to 399: Errors in DSP instructions
400 to 499: Errors in expressions
500 to 599: Errors in assembler directives
600 to 699: Errors in file inclusion, conditional assembly, or macro function
700 to 799: Warnings in DSP instructions
800 to 999: General source program warnings

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 347 of 391

(3) Fatal Errors
These are errors related to the assembler operating environment, and can occur, for example, if theavailable memory is insufficient.
The assembler outputs a message to standard error output.*1 The format of these messages is asfollows:*2" ", line <line number>:<error number> (F) <message>

Example:" ", line 0: 903(F) LISTING FILE OUTPUT ERROR

Notes: 1. The assembler outputs the message to standard output when Windows®95 orWindows®NT is used.
2. The format is as follows when Windows®95 or Windows®NT is used:(<line number>): <error number>(F)<message>

Example:(0): 903(F) LISTING FILE OUTPUT ERROR

Assembly processing is interrupted when a fatal error occurs.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 348 of 391

D.2

Error Message Tables

Table D-1
10

Command Error Messages

Message:

NO INPUT FILE SPECIFIED

Meaning:

There is no input source file specified.

Recovery procedure: Specify an input source file.
20

Message:

CANNOT OPEN FILE <file name>

Meaning:

The specified file cannot be opened.

Recovery procedure: Check and correct the file name and directory.
30

Message:

INVALID COMMAND PARAMETER

Meaning:

The command line options are not correct.

Recovery procedure: Check and correct the command line options.
40

Message:

CANNOT ALLOCATE MEMORY

Meaning:

All available memory is used up during processing.

Recovery procedure: This error only occurs when the amount of available user memory is
extremely small. If there is other processing occurring at the sametime as assembly, interrupt that processing and restart theassembler. If the error still occurs, check and correct the memory
management employed on the host system.
50

Message:

COMPLETED FILE NAME TOO LONG <file name>

Meaning:

The file name including the directory is too long.

Recovery procedure: Shorten the total length of the file name and directory path.
Supplement:

It is possible that the object module output by the assembler after
this error has occurred will not be usable with the debugger.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 349 of 391

Table D-2

Source Program Error Messages

General Source Program Syntax Errors
100

Message:

OPERATION TOO COMPLEX

Error description:

Too complex operation.

Recovery procedure: Simplify the expression for the operation.
101

Message:

SYNTAX ERROR IN SOURCE STATEMENT

Error description:

Syntax error in source statement.

Recovery procedure: Check and correct the whole source statement.
102

Message:

SYNTAX ERROR IN DIRECTIVE

Error description:

Syntax error in assembler directive source statement.

Recovery procedure: Check and correct the whole source statement.
104

Message:

LOCATION COUNTER OVERFLOW

Error description:

The value of location counter exceeded its maximum value.

Recovery procedure: Reduce the size of the program.
105

Message:

ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION IN STACK SECTION

Error description:

An executable instruction, DSP instruction, extended instruction, or
assembler directive that reserves data is in the stack section.

Recovery procedure: Remove, from the stack section, the executable instruction, DSP
instruction, extended instruction, or assembler directive that reserves
data.
106

Message:

TOO MANY ERRORS

Error description:

Error display terminated due to too many errors.

Recovery procedure: Check and correct the whole source statement.
108

Message:

ILLEGAL CONTINUATION LINE

Error description:

Illegal continuation line.

Recovery procedure: Check and correct continuation line.
109

Message:LINE NUMBER OVERFLOW

Error description:

The number of lines being assembled exceeded 65,535 lines.

Recovery procedure: Subdivide the program into multiple files.
150

Message:

INVALID DELAY SLOT INSTRUCTION

Error description:

Illegal executable instruction placed following delayed branch
instruction in memory.

Recovery procedure: Change the order of the instructions so that the illegal instruction
does not immediately follow a delayed branch instruction.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 350 of 391

Table D-2
151

Source Program Error Messages (cont)Message:

ILLEGAL EXTENDED INSTRUCTION POSITION

Error description:

Extended instruction placed following a delayed branch instruction inmemory.

Recovery procedure: Place an executable instruction following the delayed branch
instruction.
152

Message:

ILLEGAL BOUNDARY ALIGNMENT VALUE

Error description:

Illegal boundary alignment value specified for a section including
extended instructions.

Recovery procedure: Specify 2 or a larger multiple of 2 as a boundary alignment value.
153

Message:

ILLEGAL ADDRESS

Error description:

Executable or extended instruction placed at an odd address.

Recovery procedure: Place executable and extended instructions at even addresses.
REPEAT Errors
160

Message:

REPEAT LOOP NESTING

Error description:

Another REPEAT is located between a REPEAT and its end address

Recovery procedure: Correct the REPEAT location.
161

Message:

ILLEGAL START ADDRESS FOR REPEAT LOOP

Error description:

No executable or DSP instructions are located between a REPEAT
and the start address.

Recovery procedure: Use one or more executable or DSP instructions between the
REPEAT and the start address.
162

Message:

ILLEGAL DATA BEFORE REPEAT LOOP

Error description:

Illegal data is found immediately before the loop specified by a
REPEAT instruction.

Recovery procedure: If an assembler directive is located before the loop, correct thedirective. If a literal pool is located before the loop, use a .NOPOOL
directive to prevent the literal pool output.
Supplement:

When three or fewer instructions are to be repeated, an executableor DSP instruction must be located before the loop.

Symbol Errors
200

Message:

UNDEFINED SYMBOL REFERENCE

Error description:

Undefined symbol reference.

Recovery procedure: Define the symbol.
201

Message:

ILLEGAL SYMBOL OR SECTION NAME

Error description:

Reserved word specified as symbol (or section name).

Recovery procedure: Correct the symbol or section name.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 351 of 391

Table D-2
202

Source Program Error Messages (cont)Message:

ILLEGAL SYMBOL OR SECTION NAME

Error description:

Illegal symbol (or section name).

Recovery procedure: Correct the symbol or section name.
203

Message:

ILLEGAL LOCAL LABEL

Error description:

Illegal local label.

Recovery procedure: Correct the local label.
Operation and Operand Errors
300

Message:

ILLEGAL MNEMONIC

Error description:

Illegal operation.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operation.
301

Message:

TOO MANY OPERANDS OR ILLEGAL COMMENT

Error description:

Too many operands of executable instruction, or illegal comment
format.

Recovery procedure: Check and correct the operands and comment.
304

Message:

LACKING OPERANDS

Error description:

Too few operands.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operands.
307

Message:

ILLEGAL ADDRESSING MODE

Error description:

Illegal addressing mode in operand.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
308

Message:

SYNTAX ERROR IN OPERAND

Error description:

Syntax error in operand.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
309

Message:

FLOATING POINT REGISTER MISMATCH

Error description:

A double-precision floating-point register is specified for a singleprecision operation or a single-precision floating-point register is
specified for a double-precision operation.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operation size or the floating-point register.
DSP Instruction Errors
350

Message:

SYNTAX ERROR IN SOURCE STATEMENT (<mnemonic>)

Error description:

There are syntax error(s) in the DSP instruction statement.

Recovery procedure: Correct the source statement.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 352 of 391

Table D-2
351

Source Program Error Messages (cont)Message:

ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF MNEMONICS(<mnemonic>, <mnemonic>)

Error description:

Illegal combination of DSP operation instruction is specified.

Recovery procedure: Correct the combination of DSP operation instructions.
352

Message:

ILLEGAL CONDITION (<mnemonic>)

Error description:

Illegal condition for DSP operation instruction is specified.

Recovery procedure: Cancel the condition or change the DSP operation instruction.
353

Message:

ILLEGAL POSITION OF INSTRUCTION (<mnemonic>)

Error description:

The DSP operation instruction is specified in an illegal position.

Recovery procedure: Specify the DSP operation instruction in the correct position.
354

Message:

ILLEGAL ADDRESSING MODE (<mnemonic>)

Error description:

The addressing mode of the DSP operation instruction is illegal.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
355

Message:

ILLEGAL REGISTER NAME (<mnemonic>)

Error description:

The register name of the DSP operation instruction is illegal.

Recovery procedure: Correct the register name.
357

Message:

ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF MNEMONICS (<mnemonic>)

Error description:

An illegal data move instruction is specified.

Recovery procedure: Correct the data move instruction.
371

Message:

ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF MNEMONICS(<mnemonic>, <mnemonic>)

Error description:

The combination of data move instructions is illegal.

Recovery procedure: Correct the combination of data move instructions.
372

Message:

ILLEGAL ADDRESSING MODE (<mnemonic>)

Error description:

An illegal addressing mode for the data move instruction operand isspecified.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
373

Message:

ILLEGAL REGISTER NAME (<mnemonic>)

Error description:

An illegal register name for the data move instruction is specified.

Recovery procedure: Correct the register name.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 353 of 391

Table D-2

Source Program Error Messages (cont)

Expression and Operation Errors
400

Message:

CHARACTER CONSTANT TOO LONG

Error description:

Character constant is longer than 4 characters.

Recovery procedure: Correct the character constant.
402

Message:

ILLEGAL VALUE IN OPERAND

Error description:

Operand value out of range for this instruction.

Recovery procedure: Change the value.
403

Message:

ILLEGAL OPERATION FOR RELATIVE VALUE

Error description:

Attempt to perform multiplication, division, or logic operation on
relative value.

Recovery procedure: Correct the expression.
406

Message:

ILLEGAL OPERAND

Error description:

An expression is specified at the location where floating-point data
must be specified.

Recovery procedure: Specify floating-point data.
407

Message:

MEMORY OVERFLOW

Error description:

Memory overflow during expression calculation.

Recovery procedure: Simplify the expression.
408

Message:

DIVISION BY ZERO

Error description:

Attempt to divide by 0.

Recovery procedure: Correct the expression.
409

Message:

REGISTER IN EXPRESSION

Error description:

Register name in expression.

Recovery procedure: Correct the expression.
411

Message:

INVALID STARTOF/SIZEOF OPERAND

Error description:

STARTOF or SIZEOF specifies illegal section name.

Recovery procedure: Correct the section name.
412

Message:

ILLEGAL SYMBOL IN EXPRESSION

Error description:

Relative value specified as shift value.

Recovery procedure: Correct the expression.
450

Message:

ILLEGAL DISPLACEMENT VALUE

Error description:

Illegal displacement value. (Negative value is specified.)

Recovery procedure: Correct the displacement value.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 354 of 391

Table D-2
452

Source Program Error Messages (cont)Message:

ILLEGAL DATA AREA ADDRESS

Error description:

PC-relative data move instruction specifies illegal address for data
area.

Recovery procedure: Access a correct address according to the instruction operation size.
(4-byte boundary for MOV.L and MOVA, and 2-byte boundary for
MOV.W.)
453

Message:

LITERAL POOL OVERFLOW

Error description:

More than 510 extended instructions exist that have not output
literals.

Recovery procedure: Output literal pools using .POOL.
REPEAT Errors
460

Message:

ILLEGAL SYMBOL

Error description:

A backward reference symbol, an undefined symbol, or a symbol
other than a label is specified as an operand of a REPEAT, or thestart address comes after (be at a higher address than) the end
address.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
461

Message:

SYNTAX ERROR IN OPERAND

Error description:

Illegal operand.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
462

Message:

ILLEGAL VALUE IN OPERAND

Error description:

The distance between a REPEAT and the label exceeds theallowable range.

Recovery procedure: Correct the location of the REPEAT or the label.
463

Message:

NO INSTRUCTION IN REPEAT LOOP

Error description:

No instruction is found in a loop, or no instruction is found at the end
address.

Recovery procedure: Write an instruction between the start and end addresses, or specify
an address storing an instruction as the end address.
Assembler Directive Errors
500

Message:

SYMBOL NOT FOUND

Error description:

Label not defined in directive that requires label.

Recovery procedure: Insert a label.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 355 of 391

Table D-2
501

Source Program Error Messages (cont)Message:

ILLEGAL ADDRESS VALUE IN OPERAND

Error description:

Illegal specification of the start address or the value of location
counter in section.

Recovery procedure: Correct the start address or value of location counter.
502

Message:

ILLEGAL SYMBOL IN OPERAND

Error description:

Illegal value (forward reference symbol, import symbol, or relative
address symbol) specified in operand.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
503

Message:

UNDEFINED EXPORT SYMBOL

Error description:

Symbol declared for export symbol not defined in the file.

Recovery procedure: Define the symbol. Alternatively, remove the export symbol
declaration.
504

Message:

INVALID RELATIVE SYMBOL IN OPERAND

Error description:

Illegal value (forward reference symbol or import symbol) specified inoperand.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
505

Message:

ILLEGAL OPERAND

Error description:

Misspelled operand.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
506

Message:

ILLEGAL OPERAND

Error description:

Illegal element specified in operand.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
508

Message:

ILLEGAL VALUE IN OPERAND

Error description:

Operand value out of range for this directive.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
510

Message:

ILLEGAL BOUNDARY VALUE

Error description:

Illegal boundary alignment value.

Recovery procedure: Correct the boundary alignment value.
512

Message:

ILLEGAL EXECUTION START ADDRESS

Error description:

Illegal execution start address.

Recovery procedure: Correct the execution start address.
513

Message:

ILLEGAL REGISTER NAME

Error description:

Illegal register name.

Recovery procedure: Correct the register name.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 356 of 391

Table D-2
514

Source Program Error Messages (cont)Message:

INVALID EXPORT SYMBOL

Error description:

Symbol declared for export symbol that cannot be exported.

Recovery procedure: Remove the declaration for the export symbol.
516

Message:

EXCLUSIVE DIRECTIVES

Error description:

Inconsistent directive specification.

Recovery procedure: Check and correct all related directives.
517

Message:

INVALID VALUE IN OPERAND

Error description:

Illegal value (forward reference symbol, an import symbol, or
relative-address symbol) specified in operand.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
518

Message:

INVALID IMPORT SYMBOL

Error description:

Symbol declared for import defined in the file.

Recovery procedure: Remove the declaration for the import symbol.
520

Message:

ILLEGAL .CPU DIRECTIVE POSITION

Error description:.CPU is not specified at the beginning of the program, or specified
more than once.

Recovery procedure: Specify .CPU at the beginning of the program once.
521

Message:

ILLEGAL .NOPOOL DIRECTIVE POSITION

Error description:.NOPOOL placed at illegal position.

Recovery procedure: Place .NOPOOL following a delayed branch instruction.
522

Message:

ILLEGAL .POOL DIRECTIVE POSITION

Error description:.POOL placed following a delayed branch instruction.

Recovery procedure: Place an executable instruction following the delayed branch
instruction.
523

Message:

ILLEGAL OPERAND

Error description:

Illegal .LINE directive operand.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
525

Message:

ILLEGAL .LINE DIRECTIVE POSITION

Error description:.LINE directive specified during macro expansion or conditional
iterated expansion.

Recovery procedure: Change the specified position of the .LINE directive.
File Inclusion, Conditional Assembly, and Macro Errors
600

Message:

INVALID CHARACTER

Error description:

Illegal character.

Recovery procedure: Correct it.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 357 of 391

Table D-2
601

Source Program Error Messages (cont)Message:

INVALID DELIMITER

Error description:

Illegal delimiter character.

Recovery procedure: Correct it.
602

Message:

INVALID CHARACTER STRING FORMAT

Error description:

Character string error.

Recovery procedure: Correct it.
603

Message:

SYNTAX ERROR IN SOURCE STATEMENT

Error description:

Source statement syntax error.

Recovery procedure: Reexamine the entire source statement.
604

Message:

ILLEGAL SYMBOL IN OPERAND

Error description:

Illegal operand specified in a directive.

Recovery procedure: No symbol or location counter ($) can be specified as an operand of
this directive.
610

Message:

MULTIPLE MACRO NAMES

Error description:

Macro name reused in macro definition (.MACRO directive).

Recovery procedure: Correct the macro name.
611

Message:

MACRO NAME NOT FOUND

Error description:

Macro name not specified (.MACRO directive).

Recovery procedure: Specify a macro name in the name field of the .MACRO directive.
612

Message:

ILLEGAL MACRO NAME

Error description:

Macro name error (.MACRO directive).

Recovery procedure: Correct the macro name.
613

Message:

ILLEGAL .MACRO DIRECTIVE POSITION

Error description:.MACRO directive appears in macro body (between .MACRO and.ENDM directives), between .AREPEAT and .AENDR directives, or
between .AWHILE and .AENDW directives.

Recovery procedure: Remove the .MACRO directive.
614

Message:

MULTIPLE MACRO PARAMETERS

Error description:

Identical formal parameters repeated in formal parameter declarationin macro definition (.MACRO directive).

Recovery procedure: Correct the formal parameters.
615

Message:

ILLEGAL .END DIRECTIVE POSITION

Error description:.END directive appears in macro body (between .MACRO and.ENDM directives).

Recovery procedure: Remove the .END directive.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 358 of 391

Table D-2
616

Source Program Error Messages (cont)Message:

MACRO DIRECTIVES MISMATCH

Error description:

An .ENDM directive appears without a preceding .MACRO directive,
or an .EXITM directive appears outside of a macro body (between.MACRO and .ENDM directives), outside of .AREPEAT and .AENDR
directives, or outside of .AWHILE and .AENDW directives.

Recovery procedure: Remove the .ENDM or .EXITM directive.
618

Message:

MACRO EXPANSION TOO LONG

Error description:Line with over 255 characters generated by macro expansion.

Recovery procedure: Correct the definition or call so that the line is less than or equal to
255 characters.
619

Message:

ILLEGAL MACRO PARAMETER

Error description:

Macro parameter name error in macro call, or error in formal
parameter in a macro body (between .MACRO and .ENDM
directives).

Recovery procedure: Correct the formal parameter.

620

Supplement:

When there is an error in a formal parameter in a macro body, theerror will be detected and flagged during macro expansion.

Message:

UNDEFINED PREPROCESSOR VARIABLE

Error description:

Reference to an undefined preprocessor variable.

Recovery procedure: Define the preprocessor variable.
621

Message:

ILLEGAL .END DIRECTIVE POSITION

Error description:.END directive in macro expansion.

Recovery procedure: Remove the .END directive.
622

Message:')' NOT FOUND

Error description:

Matching parenthesis missing in macro processing exclusion.

Recovery procedure: Add the missing macro processing exclusion parenthesis.
623

Message:

SYNTAX ERROR IN STRING FUNCTION

Error description:

Syntax error in character string manipulation function.

Recovery procedure: Correct the character string manipulation function.
624

Message:

MACRO PARAMETERS MISMATCH

Error description:

Too many macro parameters for positional specification in macro
call.

Recovery procedure: Correct the number of macro parameters.
631

Message:

END DIRECTIVE MISMATCH

Error description:

Terminating preprocessor directive does not agree with matchingdirective.

Recovery procedure: Reexamine the preprocessor directives.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 359 of 391

Table D-2
640

Source Program Error Messages (cont)Message:

SYNTAX ERROR IN OPERAND

Error description:

Syntax error in conditional assembly directive operand.

Recovery procedure: Reexamine the entire source statement.
641

Message:

INVALID RELATIONAL OPERATOR

Error description:

Error in conditional assembly directive relational operator.

Recovery procedure: Correct the relational operator.
642

Message:

ILLEGAL .END DIRECTIVE POSITION

Error description:.END directive appears between .AREPEAT and .AENDR directives
or between .AWHILE and .AENDW directives.

Recovery procedure: Remove the .END directive.
643

Message:

DIRECTIVE MISMATCH

Error description:.AENDR or .AENDW directive does not form a proper pair with
.AREPEAT or .AWHILE directive.

Recovery procedure: Re-examine the preprocessor directives.
644

Message:

ILLEGAL .AENDW OR .AENDR DIRECTIVE POSITION

Error description:.AENDW or .AENDR directive appears between .AIF and .AENDI
directives.

Recovery procedure: Remove the .AENDW or .AENDR directive.
645

Message:

EXPANSION TOO LONG

Error description:Line with over 255 characters generated by .AREPEAT or .AWHILE
expansion.

Recovery procedure: Correct the .AREPEAT or .AWHILE to generate lines of less than orequal to 255 characters.
650

Message:

INVALID INCLUDE FILE

Error description:

Error in .INCLUDE file name.

Recovery procedure: Correct the file name.
651

Message:

CANNOT OPEN INCLUDE FILE

Error description:

Could not open .INCLUDE file.

Recovery procedure: Correct the file name.
652

Message:

INCLUDE NEST TOO DEEP

Error description:

File inclusion nesting exceeded 30 levels.

Recovery procedure: Limit the nesting to 30 or fewer levels.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 360 of 391

Table D-2
653

Source Program Error Messages (cont)Message:

SYNTAX ERROR IN OPERAND

Error description:

Syntax error in .INCLUDE operand.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand.
660

Message:.ENDM NOT FOUND

Error description:

Missing .ENDM directive following .MACRO.

Recovery procedure: Insert an .ENDM directive.
662

Message:

ILLEGAL .END DIRECTIVE POSITION

Error description:.END directive appears between .AIF and .AENDI directives.

Recovery procedure: Remove the .END directive.
663

Message:

ILLEGAL .END DIRECTIVE POSITION

Error description:.END directive appears in included file.

Recovery procedure: Remove the .END directive.
664

Message:

ILLEGAL .END DIRECTIVE POSITION

Error description:.END directive appears between .AIF and .AENDI directives.

Recovery procedure: Remove the .END directive.
665

Message:

EXPANSION TOO LONG

Error description:Lines with over 255 characters are generated by the .DEFINE
directive.

Recovery procedure: Correct the .DEFINE directive to generate lines of less than or equal
to 255 characters.
667

Message:

SUCCESSFUL CONDITION .AERROR

Error description:

Statement including the .AERROR directive was processed in the.AIF condition.

Recovery procedure: Correct the conditional statement so that the .AERROR directive is
not processed.
668

Message:

ILLEGAL VALUE IN OPERAND

Error description:

Error in the operand of the directive.

Recovery procedure: Specify, as the operand of this directive, a symbol defined by.DEFINE directive.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 361 of 391

Table D-3

Source Program Warning Messages

DSP Instruction Warnings
700

Message:

ILLEGAL VALUE IN OPERAND (<mnemonic>)

Error description:

The operand value of the DSP operation instruction exceeds the
specifiable range.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand value within the specifiable range.
701

Message:

MULTIPLE REGISTER IN DESTINATION(<mnemonic>, <mnemonic>)

Error description:

The same register is specified as multiple destination operands ofthe DSP instruction.

Recovery procedure: Specify the register correctly.
702

Message:

ILLEGAL OPERATION SIZE (<mnemonic>)

Error description:

The operation size of the DSP operation instruction or the datatransfer instruction is illegal.

Recovery procedure: Cancel or correct the operation size.
703

Message:

MULTIPLE REGISTER IN DESTINATION(<mnemonic>, <mnemonic>)

Error description:

The same register is specified as the destination registers of the
DSP operation instruction and data transfer instruction.

Recovery procedure: Specify the register correctly.
General Source Program Warnings
800

Message:

SYMBOL NAME TOO LONG

Error description:

A symbol exceeded 251 characters.

Recovery procedure: Correct the symbol.

801

Supplement:

The assembler ignores the characters starting at the 252nd
character.

Message:

MULTIPLE SYMBOLS

Error description:

Symbol already defined.

Recovery procedure: Remove the symbol redefinition.
807

Supplement:

The assembler ignores the second and later definitions.

Message:

ILLEGAL OPERATION SIZE

Error description:

Illegal operation size.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operation size.
Supplement:

The assembler ignores the incorrect operation size specification.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 362 of 391

Table D-3
808

Source Program Warning Messages (cont)Message:

ILLEGAL CONSTANT SIZE

Error description:

Illegal notation of integer constant.

Recovery procedure: Correct the notation.

810

Supplement:

The assembler may misinterpret the integer constant, i.e., interpret it
as a value not intended by the programmer.

Message:

TOO MANY OPERANDS

Error description:

Too many operands or illegal comment format.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand or the comment.
811

Supplement:

The assembler ignores the extra operands.

Message:

ILLEGAL SYMBOL DEFINITION

Error description:

Specified label in assembler directive that cannot have a label.

Recovery procedure: Remove the label specification.
813

Supplement:

The assembler ignores the label.

Message:

SECTION ATTRIBUTE MISMATCH

Error description:

A different section type is specified on section restart (reentry), or, asection start address is respecified at the restart of absolute section.

Recovery procedure: Do not respecify the section type or start address on section reentry.
815

Supplement:

The specification of starting section remains valid.

Message:

MULTIPLE MODULE NAMES

Error description:

Respecification of object module name.

Recovery procedure: Specify the object module name once in a program.

816

Supplement:

The assembler ignores the second and later object module namespecifications.

Message:

ILLEGAL DATA AREA ADDRESS

Error description:

Illegal allocation of data or data area.

Recovery procedure: Locate the word data or data area on an even address. Locate thelong word or single-precision data or data area on an address of amultiple of 4. Locate the double-precision data or data area on an
address of a multiple of 8.

817

Supplement:

The assembler corrects the location of the data or data areaaccording to its size.

Message:

ILLEGAL BOUNDARY VALUE

Error description:

A boundary alignment value less than 4 specified for a code section.

Recovery procedure: The specification is valid, but if an executable instruction, DSP
instruction, or extended instruction is located at an odd address,
error 153 occurs.
Supplement:

Special care must be taken when specifying 1 for code section
boundary alignment value.
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 363 of 391

Table D-3
818

Source Program Warning Messages (cont)Message:

COMMAND LINE OPTION MISMATCH FOR FLOATING DIRECTIVE

Error description:

When the CPU type is SH-2E or SH-3E, the ROUND=NEAREST or
DENORMALIZE=ON command line option is specified.

Recovery procedure: Change the specification in the ROUND or DENORMALIZE
command line option.

825

Supplement:

The assembler creates the object code according to the specificationin the ROUND or DENORMALIZE command line option.

Message:

ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION IN DUMMY SECTION

Error description:

An executable instruction, DSP instruction, extended instruction, or
assembler directive that reserves data is in dummy section.

Recovery procedure: Remove, from the dummy section, the executable instruction, DSP
instruction, extended instruction, or assembler directive that reserves
data.

826

Supplement:

The assembler ignores the executable instruction, DSP instruction,
extended instruction, or assembler directive that reserves data indummy section.

Message:

ILLEGAL PRECISION

Error description:

The floating-point constant does not have the same precision
specified with the operation size.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operation size or the precision type of the floating-point
constant.

832

Supplement:

The assembler assumes the precision specified with the operation
size.

Message:

MULTIPLE ‘P' DEFINITIONS

Error description:

Symbol P already defined before a default section is used.

Recovery procedure: Do not define P as a symbol if a default section is used.

835

Supplement:

The assembler regards P as the name of the default section, andignores other definitions of the symbol P.

Message:

ILLEGAL VALUE IN OPERAND

Error description:

Operand value out of range for this instruction.

Recovery procedure: Correct the value.

836

Supplement:

The assembler generates object code with a value corrected to bewithin range.

Message:

ILLEGAL CONSTANT SIZE

Error description:

Illegal notation of integer constant.

Recovery procedure: Correct the notation.
Supplement:

The assembler may misinterpret the integer constant, i.e., interpret it
as a value not intended by the programmer.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 364 of 391

Table D-3
837

Source Program Warning Messages (cont)Message:

SOURCE STATEMENT TOO LONG

Error description:

The length of a source statement exceeded 255 bytes.

Recovery procedure: Rewrite the source statement to be within 255 bytes by, for example,
rewriting the comment. Alternatively, rewrite the statement as a multiline statement.

838

Supplement:

The assembler ignores byte number 256, and regards the charactersstarting at byte 257 as the next statement.

Message:

ILLEGAL CHARACTER CODE

Error description:

The shift JIS code or EUC code is specified outside character stringsand comments, or the SJIS or EUC command line option is not
specified.

Recovery procedure: Specify the shift JIS code or EUC code in character strings orcomments. Specify the SJIS or EUC command line option.
839

Message:

ILLEGAL FIGURE IN OPERAND

Error description:

Fixed-point data having six or more digits is specified in word size, orthat having 11 or more digits is specified in long-word size.

Recovery procedure: Reduce the digits to the limit.
840

Message:

OPERAND OVERFLOW

Error description:

Floating-point data overflows.

Recovery procedure: Modify the value.

841

Supplement:

The assembler assumes +∞ when the value is positive and –∞ whennegative.

Message:

OPERAND UNDERFLOW

Error description:

Floating-point data underflows.

Recovery procedure: Modify the value.

842

Supplement:

The assembler assumes +0 when the value is negative and –0 whennegative.

Message:

OPERAND DENORMALIZED

Error description:

Denormalized numbers are specified for floating-point data.

Recovery procedure: Check and correct the floating-point data.

850

Supplement:

The assembler creates the object code according to the specification(sets denormalized numbers).

Message:

ILLEGAL SYMBOL DEFINITION

Error description:

Symbol specified in label field.

Recovery procedure: Remove the symbol.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 365 of 391

Table D-3
851

Source Program Warning Messages (cont)Message:

MACRO SERIAL NUMBER OVERFLOW

Error description:

Macro generation counter exceeded 99,999.

Recovery procedure: Reduce the number of macro calls.
852

Message:

UNNECESSARY CHARACTER

Error description:

Characters appear after the operands.

Recovery procedure: Correct the operand(s).
854

Message:.AWHILE ABORTED BY .ALIMIT

Error description:

Expansion count has reached the maximum value specified by.ALIMIT directive, and expansion has been terminated.

Recovery procedure: Check the condition for iterated expansion.
870

Message:

ILLEGAL DISPLACEMENT VALUE

Error description:

Illegal displacement value.
(Either the displacement value is not an even number when theoperation size is word, or the displacement value is not a multiple of
4 when the operation size is long word.)

Recovery procedure: Take account of the fact that the assembler corrects thedisplacement value.
Supplement:

The assembler generates object code with the displacement
corrected according to the operation size.
(For a word size operation the assembler discards the low order bitof the displacement to create an even number, and for a long word
size operation the assembler discards the two low order bits of thedisplacement to create a multiple of 4.)

871

Message:

PC RELATIVE IN DELAY SLOT

Error description:

Executable instruction with PC relative addressing mode operand islocated following delayed branch instruction.

Recovery procedure: Take account of the fact that the value of PC is changed by adelayed branch instruction.

874

Supplement:

The assembler generates object code exactly as specified in the
program.

Message:

CANNOT CHECK DATA AREA BOUNDARY

Error description:

Cannot check data area boundary for PC-relative data move
instructions.

Recovery procedure: Note carefully the data area boundary at linkage process.
Supplement:

The assembler only outputs this message when a data move
instruction is included in a relative section, or when an import symbol
is used to indicate a data area.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 366 of 391

Table D-3
875

Source Program Warning Messages (cont)Message:

CANNOT CHECK DISPLACEMENT SIZE

Error description:

Cannot check displacement size for PC-relative data move
instructions.

Recovery procedure: Note carefully the distance between data move instructions and data
area at linkage.

876

Supplement:

The assembler only outputs this message when a data move
instruction is included in a relative section, or when an import symbol
is used to indicate a data area.

Message:

ASSEMBLER OUTPUTS BRA INSTRUCTION

Error description:

The assembler automatically outputs a BRA instruction.

Recovery procedure: Specify a literal pool output position using .POOL, or check that the
program to which a BRA instruction is added can run normally.

880

Supplement:

When a literal pool output location is not available, the assembler
automatically outputs literal pool and a BRA instruction to jump overthe literal pool.

Message:

END NOT FOUND

Error description:

No .END in the program.

Recovery procedure: Add an .END.
881

Message:

ILLEGAL DIRECTIVE IN REPEAT LOOP

Error description:

An illegal assembler directive was found in a loop.

Recovery procedure: Delete the directive.
Supplement:

If a directive that reserves a data item or a data area, an .ALIGN
directive, or an .ORG directive is used in a loop, the assembler
counts the directive as one of the instructions to be repeated.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 367 of 391

Table D-4

Fatal Error Messages

Fatal Errors
901

Message:

SOURCE FILE INPUT ERROR

Error description:

Source file input error.

Recovery procedure: Check the hard disk for adequate free space. Create the required
free space by deleting unnecessary files.
902

Message:

MEMORY OVERFLOW

Error description:

Insufficient memory. (Unable to process the temporary information.)

Recovery procedure: Subdivide the program.
903

Message:

LISTING FILE OUTPUT ERROR

Error description:

Output error on the list file.

Recovery procedure: Check the hard disk for adequate free space. Create the required
free space by deleting unnecessary files.
904

Message:

OBJECT FILE OUTPUT ERROR

Error description:

Output error on the object file.

Recovery procedure: Check the hard disk for adequate free space. Create the required
free space by deleting unnecessary files.
905

Message:

MEMORY OVERFLOW

Error description:

Insufficient memory. (Unable to process the line information.)

Recovery procedure: Subdivide the program.
906

Message:

MEMORY OVERFLOW

Error description:

Insufficient memory. (Unable to process the symbol information.)

Recovery procedure: Subdivide the program.
907

Message:

MEMORY OVERFLOW

Error description:

Insufficient memory. (Unable to process the section information.)

Recovery procedure: Subdivide the program.
908

Message:

SECTION OVERFLOW

Error description:

The number of sections exceeded 65,535.

Recovery procedure: Subdivide the program.
909

Message:

SYMBOL OVERFLOW

Error description:

The number of symbols exceeded 65,535.

Recovery procedure: Subdivide the program.
910

Message:

SOURCE LINE NUMBER OVERFLOW

Error description:

The number of source program lines exceeded 65,535.

Recovery procedure: Subdivide the program.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 368 of 391

Table D-4
911

Fatal Error Messages (cont)Message:

IMPORT SYMBOL OVERFLOW

Error description:

The number of import symbols exceeded 65,535.

Recovery procedure: Reduce the number of import symbols.
912

Message:

EXPORT SYMBOL OVERFLOW

Error description:

The number of export symbols exceeded 65,535.

Recovery procedure: Reduce the number of export symbols.
933

Message:

ILLEGAL ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE

Error description:

The specified target CPU is incorrect.

Recovery procedure: Correct the target CPU.
935

Message:

SUBCOMMAND FILE INPUT ERROR

Error description:

Subcommand file input error.

Recovery procedure: Check the hard disk for adequate free space. Create the required
free space by deleting unnecessary files.
936

Message:

SUPPLEMENT FILE OUTPUT ERROR

Error description:

Supplement file output error.

Recovery procedure: Check the hard disk for adequate free space. Create the required
free space by deleting unnecessary files.
950

Message:

MEMORY OVERFLOW

Error description:

Insufficient memory.

Recovery procedure: Separate the source program.
951

Message:

LITERAL POOL OVERFLOW

Error description:

More than 100,000 internal symbols are used for literal pools.

Recovery procedure: Separate the source program.
952

Message:

LITERAL POOL OVERFLOW

Error description:

Literal pool capacity overflow.

Recovery procedure: Insert unconditional branch before overflow.
953

Message:

MEMORY OVERFLOW

Error description:

Insufficient memory.

Recovery procedure: Separate the source program.
954

Message:

LOCAL BLOCK NUMBER OVERFLOW

Error description:

The number of local blocks that are valid in the local label exceeded
100,000.

Recovery procedure: Separate the source program.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 369 of 391

Table D-4
956

Fatal Error Messages (cont)Message:

EXPAND FILE INPUT/OUTPUT ERROR

Error description:

File output error for preprocessor expansion.

Recovery procedure: Check the hard disk for adequate free space. Create the required
free space by deleting unnecessary files.
957

Message:

MEMORY OVERFLOW

Error description:

Insufficient memory.

Recovery procedure: Separate the source program.
958

Message:

MEMORY OVERFLOW

Error description:

Insufficient memory.

Recovery procedure: Separate the source program.

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 370 of 391

Appendix E Differences from Version 3.1
The differences between this new version (V.4.0) and the former version (V.3.1) are described
below.

E.1

CPU

This version includes assembly functions for the SH-2E, SH-4, and SH3-DSP in addition to theSH-1, SH-2, SH-3, SH-3E, and SH-DSP, and the following items are added or changed.
• Reserved words• Executable instructions• .CPU assembler directive• CPU command line option• SHCPU environment variable
References:
Reserved words→ Programmer's Guide, 1.2, "Reserved Words"
Executable instructions→ Programmer's Guide, 3, "Executable Instructions".CPU assembler directive→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.1, "Assembler Directive Related to CPU"
–CPU command line option→ User's Guide, 2.2.1, "Target CPU Command Line Option"
SHCPU environment variable→ User's Guide, 1.3, "SHCPU Environment Variable"

E.2

Object Format

In the new version, ELF/DWARF object format is supported in addition to those supported in theformer version.
The assembler outputs ELF/DWARF supplement information when outputting debug information.
References:
Debug information→ Programmer's Guide, 5.2.6, "Object Module Assembler Directives", .OUTPUT→ User's Guide, 2.2.2, "Object Module Command Line Options", –DEBUG

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 371 of 391

E.3

Constants

In the new version, double-precision floating-point constants can be used in addition to singleprecision floating-point constants.
• Double-precision floating-point constants are used in the SH-4.
Reference:
Floating-point constants→ Programmer's Guide, 1.4.3, "Floating-Point Constants"

E.4

Changed Assembler Directives

Table E-1 lists the double-precision registers and operation sizes added to assembler directives
and assembler statements related to floating-point constants in the new version.
Table E-1

Changed Assembler Directives and Statements

Assembler Directive
or Statement

Function

Reference inProgrammer's Guide.FREG

Floating-point register types

5.2.3.FDATA

Double-precision operation size

5.2.4

.FDATABDouble-precision operation size

5.2.4

.FRES

Double-precision operation size

5.2.4

E.5

Added Command Line Options

Table E-2 lists the command line options added to the new version.
Table E-2

Added Command Line Options

Command Line Option

Function

Reference in User's Guide

ROUND

Selection of floating-point
data rounding mode

2.2.10DENORMALIZE

Selection of how to handle
denormalized numbers infloating-point data

2.2.10Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 372 of 391

Reference:
Floating-point constants→ Programmer's Guide, 1.4.3, "Floating-Point Constants"

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 373 of 391

Appendix F ASCII Code Table
Table F-1

ASCII Code Table
Upper 4 Bits

Lower 4 Bits

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

NUL

DLE

SP

0

@

P

`

p

1

SOH

DC1

!

1

A

Q

a

q

2

STX

DC2

”

2

B

R

b

r

3

ETX

DC3

#

3

C

S

c

s

4

EOT

DC4

$

4

D

T

d

t

5

ENQ

NAK

%

5

E

U

e

u

6

ACK

SYN

&

6

F

V

f

v

7

BEL

ETB

’

7

G

W

g

w

8

BS

CAN

(

8

H

X

h

x

9

HT

EM

)

9

I

Y

i

y

A

LF

SUB

*

:

J

Z

j

z

B

VT

ESC

+

;

K

[

k

{

C

FF

FS

,

<

L

\

l

|

D

CR

GS

–

=

M

]

m

}

E

SO

RS

.

>

N

^

n

~

F

SI

US

/

?

O

_

o

DEL

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 374 of 391

IndexA
A0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 83, 96, 101
A0G -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 101
A1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 96, 101
A1G -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 101-ABORT------------------------------------------------------------------------------318
absolute address ---------------------------------------------------------------------50
absolute address section --------------------------------------------------------50
absolute address section declaration ------------------------------------------111
absolute address symbol --------------------------------------------------------52
absolute address value ----------------------------------------------------------52, 115
absolute path -------------------------------------------------------------------------202, 203
absolute value------------------------------------------------------------------------52
ADD ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------66, 69
ADDC --------------------------------------------------------------------------------69
address calculation ------------------------------------------------------------------86
address symbol ----------------------------------------------------------------------16
absolute address symbol -------------------------------------------------------52
relative address symbol ---------------------------------------------------------52
addressing mode --------------------------------------------------------------------62
executable instruction mnemonic and addressing mode combination ----67
GBR indirect with displacement-----------------------------------------------62
GBR indirect with index --------------------------------------------------------62
immediate-------------------------------------------------------------------------63
PC relative with displacement -------------------------------------------------62
register direct---------------------------------------------------------------------62
register indirect ------------------------------------------------------------------62
register indirect with displacement -------------------------------------------62
register indirect with index -----------------------------------------------------62
register indirect with post-increment------------------------------------------62
register indirect with pre-decrement ------------------------------------------62
symbol ----------------------------------------------------------------------------63, 65
ADDV --------------------------------------------------------------------------------69.AELIF--------------------------------------------------------------------------------219.AELSE-------------------------------------------------------------------------------219, 222.AENDI-------------------------------------------------------------------------------219, 222.AENDR------------------------------------------------------------------------------224.AENDW ----------------------------------------------------------------------------226.AERROR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------229.AIF -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------219.AIFDEF------------------------------------------------------------------------------222.ALIGN-------------------------------------------------------------------------------116.ALIMIT------------------------------------------------------------------------------233.AREPEAT---------------------------------------------------------------------------224
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 375 of 391

AND---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66, 70
arithmetic operation instruction--------------------------------------------------- 69, 73, 79, 81
As ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 101
ASCII -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 374
assemble listing --------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
assemble listing assembler directive------------------------------------------ 178
assemble listing column count setting ---------------------------------------- 185, 307
assemble listing command line option --------------------------------------- 295
assemble listing line count setting -------------------------------------------- 185, 306
assemble listing output control ------------------------------------------------ 179, 296
assemble listing output example ---------------------------------------------- 341
assembler ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3, 6
assembler directive ---------------------------------------------------------------- 12, 103
assembler directive mnemonic ----------------------------------------------- 103
assembly-language source program ---------------------------------------------- 4, 6, 7
.ASSIGN----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 121.ASSIGNA--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 212-ASSIGNA -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 311.ASSIGNC--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 215-ASSIGNC--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 313-AUTO_LITERAL ----------------------------------------------------------------- 324.AWHILE---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 226
Ax------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 101
Ay------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 101
Az------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100, 101
B
B' ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
backward ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
backward reference----------------------------------------------------------------- 56
BF------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71, 85
BF/S ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73, 85
bias ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24bias value --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
binary--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19, 196
blank line output to source program listing ------------------------------------- 191
boundary alignment
boundary alignment value ----------------------------------------------------- 109
correcting of location counter value ------------------------------------------ 30, 116
BRA ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71, 85
BRAF--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73, 85
branch instruction------------------------------------------------------------------- 71, 73
delayed branch instruction ----------------------------------------------------- 84, 85
BSR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71, 85
BSRF --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73, 85

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 376 of 391

BT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------71, 85
BT/S ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------73, 85Ccharacter constant -------------------------------------------------------------------20
character preprocessor variable definition ---------------------------------------215, 313
character string ----------------------------------------------------------------------40
character string data area reservation -----------------------------------------152
character string data area reservation with length ---------------------------154
character string data area reservation with zero terminator ----------------156
character string data block reservation----------------------------------------135
character string data reservation -----------------------------------------------133
character string data reservation with length---------------------------------138
character string data reservation with zero terminator ----------------------140
character string length count ---------------------------------------------------250
character string manipulation function ---------------------------------------246, 249
character string search ----------------------------------------------------------252
CLRMAC ---------------------------------------------------------------------------72
CLRS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------77
CLRT ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------72
CMP/EQ------------------------------------------------------------------------------66, 69
CMP/GE------------------------------------------------------------------------------69
CMP/GT------------------------------------------------------------------------------69
CMP/HI-------------------------------------------------------------------------------69
CMP/HS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------69
CMP/PL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------69
CMP/PZ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------69
CMP/STR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------69
code section -------------------------------------------------------------------------45
code section declaration --------------------------------------------------------109
codingcoding of source statement -----------------------------------------------------13
coding of source statements across multiple lines---------------------------15, 94
coding of symbol ---------------------------------------------------------------18-COLUMNS -------------------------------------------------------------------------307
command line------------------------------------------------------------------------281
command line option ---------------------------------------------------------------285
comment------------------------------------------------------------------------------12, 14, 61
comment in macro---------------------------------------------------------------246
comment of source statements across multiple lines------------------------15
common section --------------------------------------------------------------------47
common section declaration----------------------------------------------------109
compiler ------------------------------------------------------------------------------6, 7
conditional assembly ---------------------------------------------------------------205
conditional assembly directive ------------------------------------------------211

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 377 of 391

conditional assembly with comparison--------------------------------------- 207, 219
conditional assembly with definition ----------------------------------------- 208, 222
conditional iterated expansion ---------------------------------------------------- 210, 226
maximum count specification ------------------------------------------------ 233
constant ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 19, 52
constant symbol--------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
control character -------------------------------------------------------------------- 133, 136, 138, 140
CPU ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 283, 288.CPU --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106-CPU --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 288-CROSS_REFERENCE ----------------------------------------------------------- 300
cross-reference listing -------------------------------------------------------------- 344
cross-reference listing output control ---------------------------------------- 179, 300
D
D' ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
Da------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 101.DATA ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 128
data area reservation---------------------------------------------------------------- 149.DATAB ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 130
data move instruction -------------------------------------------------------------- 67, 74, 76, 78, 80, 93,99
single data move instruction --------------------------------------------------- 93, 102
X data move instruction -------------------------------------------------------- 93, 102
Y data move instruction -------------------------------------------------------- 93, 102data section -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 46
data section declaration--------------------------------------------------------- 109
data structure ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 48
data structure represented using dummy section---------------------------- 48
DBR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16, 80
DCF ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 92
DCT ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 92.DEBUG ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 171-DEBUG ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 292
debug information ------------------------------------------------------------------ 170
debug information output control --------------------------------------------- 168, 292
supplement debug information file (ELF/DWARF supplement
information)---------------------------------------------------------------------- 169, 292
decimal------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19, 196
decrement---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 63.DEFINE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 217-DEFINE----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 315
delay slot instruction --------------------------------------------------------------- 85
delayed branch instruction--------------------------------------------------------- 84, 85-DENORMALIZE------------------------------------------------------------------ 332
denormalized numbers ------------------------------------------------------------- 22, 23, 25, 26, 332
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 378 of 391

Dg -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------96
disp------------------------------------------------------------------------------------62, 64, 68
displacement -------------------------------------------------------------------------62, 63
correcting of displacement -----------------------------------------------------66
DIV0S --------------------------------------------------------------------------------69
DIV0U--------------------------------------------------------------------------------69
DIV1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------69
division by zero ---------------------------------------------------------------------39
DMULS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------73
DMULU ------------------------------------------------------------------------------73
double precision ---------------------------------------------------------------------22, 23, 24, 25, 61
Dp -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------96
DRn -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 80
Ds -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------101
DSP instruction ----------------------------------------------------------------------91, 95
DSP operation instruction -----------------------------------------------------95
DSR -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 83
DT-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------73
Du -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------96
dummy section ----------------------------------------------------------------------48
caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------50
data structure represented using dummy section ----------------------------48
dummy section declaration -----------------------------------------------------109
DWARF ------------------------------------------------------------------------------169, 292
Dx -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------101
Dy -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------101
Dz -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------96, 101E
editor----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6
ELF -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------169, 292
emulator ------------------------------------------------------------------------------7.END ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------198
endian---------------------------------------------------------------------------------173, 294
endian selection ------------------------------------------------------------------173, 294.ENDIAN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------173-ENDIAN ----------------------------------------------------------------------------294.ENDM -------------------------------------------------------------------------------238
environment variable ---------------------------------------------------------------283
SH-CPU environment variable ------------------------------------------------283.EQU ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------119
error level change -------------------------------------------------------------------318-EUC----------------------------------------------------------------------------------321
EUC code ----------------------------------------------------------------------------13, 20, 40, 321, 322
executable instruction --------------------------------------------------------------61, 67
executable instruction list-------------------------------------------------------67
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 379 of 391

executable instruction mnemonic --------------------------------------------- 67
executable instruction mnemonic and addressing mode combination --- 67.EXITM ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 231, 241-EXPAND --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 317
exponent part ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 21, 23, 24
export--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 58
export assembler directive ----------------------------------------------------- 160
export symbol ------------------------------------------------------------------- 58
export symbol declaration ----------------------------------------------------- 58, 161, 165.EXPORT ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 161
expression --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31
element --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31
internal processing -------------------------------------------------------------- 39
notes on expressions ------------------------------------------------------------ 39
operation precedence ----------------------------------------------------------- 33
extended instruction ---------------------------------------------------------------- 68, 258, 272
external------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
external definition ------------------------------------------------------------------ 58
external reference------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
external reference value------------------------------------------------------------ 52
EXTS--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
EXTU -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
F
FABS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75, 79, 81
FADD -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75, 79, 81
FCMP/EQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75, 79, 81
FCMP/GT---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75, 79, 81
FCNVDS----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 82
FCNVSD----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 82.FDATA------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 142.FDATAB---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 144
FDIV --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75, 79, 81
file format---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 282
file inclusion------------------------------------------------------------------------- 201, 202
nesting of file inclusion -------------------------------------------------------- 202
file name ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 282
file specification format------------------------------------------------------------ 282
FIPR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
fixed-point data format------------------------------------------------------------- 28
fixed-point data reservation---------------------------------------------------- 147
fixed-point number ----------------------------------------------------------------- 26
FLDI0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 74, 78
FLDI1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 74, 78
FLDS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75, 79
FLOAT------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75, 79, 82
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 380 of 391

floating-point constant--------------------------------------------------------------21
floating-point data ------------------------------------------------------------------22
floating-point data format ------------------------------------------------------23
floating-point data area reservation -------------------------------------------158
floating-point data block reservation------------------------------------------144
floating-point data reservation -------------------------------------------------142
floating-point register name alias definition -------------------------------------125
FMAC --------------------------------------------------------------------------------75, 79
FMOV --------------------------------------------------------------------------------74, 78, 80
FMUL --------------------------------------------------------------------------------75, 79, 81
FNEG ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------75, 79, 81.FORM--------------------------------------------------------------------------------185
formal parameter --------------------------------------------------------------------236, 238
default ----------------------------------------------------------------------------238
forward -------------------------------------------------------------------------------55
forward reference -------------------------------------------------------------------56
FPSCR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 74, 78
FPUL ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 74, 78
fraction part --------------------------------------------------------------------------24, 28
FRCHG -------------------------------------------------------------------------------82.FREG --------------------------------------------------------------------------------125.FRES ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------158
FRn------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 74, 78
FSCHG -------------------------------------------------------------------------------82
FSQRT--------------------------------------------------------------------------------79, 81
FSTS ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------75, 79
FSUB ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------75, 79, 81
FTRC ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------75, 79, 82
FTRV ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------81
FVn -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 80
G
GBR-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 62, 68
GBR indirect with displacement-----------------------------------------------62
GBR indirect with index --------------------------------------------------------62.GLOBAL ----------------------------------------------------------------------------165
H
H' -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19
header for source program listing -------------------------------------------------187.HEADING --------------------------------------------------------------------------187
hexadecimal--------------------------------------------------------------------------19, 196
I
imm -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------68, 258
immediate ----------------------------------------------------------------------------63, 66
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 381 of 391

import -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 59
import assembler directive ----------------------------------------------------- 160
import symbol ------------------------------------------------------------------- 52, 59
import symbol declaration ----------------------------------------------------- 59, 163, 165.IMPORT ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 163.INCLUDE -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 202-INCLUDE -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 309
include file directory specification ----------------------------------------------- 309
inclusion ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 201
increment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 63
infinity ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22, 25
input source file --------------------------------------------------------------------- 281.INSTR ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 252
integerdefault radix for integer constants -------------------------------------------- 196
integer constant------------------------------------------------------------------ 19
integer data block reservation ------------------------------------------------- 130
integer data reservation--------------------------------------------------------- 128
integer part--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
integer preprocessor variable definition ----------------------------------------- 212, 311
internal processing of expression ------------------------------------------------- 39
internal symbol---------------------------------------------------------------------- 18
Is ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 101
iterated expansion ------------------------------------------------------------------ 209, 224
termination ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 231
Ix ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 101
Iy ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 101
Iz ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100, 101
J
Japanese character ------------------------------------------------------------------ 13, 20, 40, 320, 321,
322
JMP----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71, 85
JSR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71, 85
K
keyword specification -------------------------------------------------------------- 247
Llabel ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12, 13
LDC ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72, 77, 82, 84, 85
LDRE -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 83, 272
LDRS--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 83, 272
LDS----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72, 75, 79, 84
LDTLB------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77.LEN---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 250
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 382 of 391

librarian-------------------------------------------------------------------------------6, 7
library file ----------------------------------------------------------------------------6, 7
line
line length ------------------------------------------------------------------------337
maximum length -----------------------------------------------------------------13
line number --------------------------------------------------------------------------176
line number modification -------------------------------------------------------176.LINE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------176-LINES -------------------------------------------------------------------------------306
linkage editor ------------------------------------------------------------------------6, 7.LIST----------------------------------------------------------------------------------181-LIST ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------296
listing file-----------------------------------------------------------------------------282
listing output file specification ----------------------------------------------------296
literal pool
automatic literal pool generation function------------------------------------257
extended instruction related to automatic literal pool generation ---------258
size mode for automatic literal pool generation -----------------------------258, 324
load module --------------------------------------------------------------------------6, 7
S-type-format load module-----------------------------------------------------6, 7
local label ----------------------------------------------------------------------------42
location -------------------------------------------------------------------------------29
location counter ---------------------------------------------------------------------29
value of location counter -------------------------------------------------------29
correcting of location counter value ------------------------------------------30, 116
location-counter-value setting -------------------------------------------------114
logic operation instruction ---------------------------------------------------------70
M
M0-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 96, 101
M1-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 96, 101
MAC ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------69, 73
MACH --------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 68
MACL --------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 68
macro ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------235
character string manipulation function ---------------------------------------246, 249
comments in macro--------------------------------------------------------------246
macro body -----------------------------------------------------------------------243
macro call-------------------------------------------------------------------------247
macro definition -----------------------------------------------------------------235, 238
macro expansion termination --------------------------------------------------241
macro function -------------------------------------------------------------------235
macro function directive--------------------------------------------------------237
macro generation number ------------------------------------------------------244
macro name ----------------------------------------------------------------------238

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 383 of 391

macro parameter----------------------------------------------------------------- 236
macro replacement processing exclusion ------------------------------------ 245.MACRO----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 238
maximum count specification for conditional iterated expansion ------------ 233
maximum length of a line --------------------------------------------------------- 13
memory location of section ------------------------------------------------------- 50
mnemonic---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12, 61, 67, 337
assembler directive mnemonic ------------------------------------------------ 103
executable instruction mnemonic and addressing mode combination --- 67
MOD --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16, 83
MOV --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 67, 85, 257
MOVA ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 67, 85, 257
MOVS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 99, 102
MOVT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 68
MOVX ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 99, 102
MOVY ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 99, 102
MUL---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73
MULS -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
multiple lines
source statement across multiple lines---------------------------------------- 15, 94
multiple source file assembly ----------------------------------------------------- 57, 281
MULU ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
N
NAN---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
NEAREST --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 330
NEG ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
NEGC -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
nesting of file inclusion ------------------------------------------------------------ 202
new page insertion to source program listing ----------------------------------- 189-NOCROSS_REFERENCE ------------------------------------------------------- 300-NODEBUG------------------------------------------------------------------------- 292-NOLIST----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 296-NOOBJECT ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 290
NOP ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72.NOPOOL --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 266, 267
NOPX -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 99, 102
NOPY -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 99, 102
normalized number ----------------------------------------------------------------- 22, 23, 25-NOSECTION ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 302-NOSHOW -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 304-NOSOURCE ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 298
NOT ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 70
not-a-number (NAN)--------------------------------------------------------------- 22, 25

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 384 of 391

O-OBJECT -----------------------------------------------------------------------------290
object code ---------------------------------------------------------------------------29
object converter ---------------------------------------------------------------------6
object file-----------------------------------------------------------------------------282
object module------------------------------------------------------------------------4, 6, 7, 167, 168
object module assembler directive --------------------------------------------167
object module command line option ------------------------------------------289
object module name -------------------------------------------------------------194
object module output control---------------------------------------------------168, 290
object output file specification ----------------------------------------------------290
OCBI----------------------------------------------------------------------------------82
OCBP ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------82
OCBWB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------82
octal -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------19, 196
operand -------------------------------------------------------------------------------12, 14, 61
operating system --------------------------------------------------------------------281
return code to operating system------------------------------------------------281
operation -----------------------------------------------------------------------------12, 13, 61
internal processing---------------------------------------------------------------39
operation precedence------------------------------------------------------------33
executable instruction and operation size combination---------------------67
operator-------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 31
operator association rule --------------------------------------------------------33
operator precedence -------------------------------------------------------------33
OR-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------66, 70.ORG----------------------------------------------------------------------------------114-OUTCODE--------------------------------------------------------------------------322.OUTPUT ----------------------------------------------------------------------------168
overflow boundary ------------------------------------------------------------------22
P
PABS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------91, 95, 98
PADD---------------------------------------------------------------------------------91, 95, 98
PADDC-------------------------------------------------------------------------------91, 95, 98.PAGE --------------------------------------------------------------------------------189
PAND---------------------------------------------------------------------------------91, 95, 98
parallel operation instruction ------------------------------------------------------92
parenthesis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------32
PC -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 62, 64, 68
value of PC ----------------------------------------------------------------------86
PC relative with displacement -----------------------------------------------------62
PCLR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------91, 95, 98
PCMP ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------91, 95, 98

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 385 of 391

PCOPY------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 98
PDEC--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 98
PDMSB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 91, 95, 98
PINC --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 98
PLDS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 98
PMULS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 91, 95, 98
PNEG -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 98.POOL-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 260, 262, 267
POR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 98
positional specification------------------------------------------------------------- 247
PR------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16, 68
precedence--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33
PREF --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
preprocessor expansion
error generation during preprocessor expansion ---------------------------- 229
preprocessor expansion result output----------------------------------------- 317
preprocessor replacement character string definition -------------------------- 217, 315
preprocessor variable--------------------------------------------------------------- 205
character preprocessor variable definition ----------------------------------- 215, 313
integer preprocessor variable definition-------------------------------------- 212, 311.PRINT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 179
PRND -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 98.PROGRAM ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 194
program counter (PC) -------------------------------------------------------------- 16, 62, 64, 68
value of program counter ------------------------------------------------------ 86
program length ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 337
PSHA--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 96, 98
PSHL --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 96, 98
PSTS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 98
PSUB --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 99
PSUBC ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 99
PXOR -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91, 95, 99
Q
Q' ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
qNAN -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
R
R0------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16, 62, 68
R15 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
radix ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
default radix for integer constant---------------------------------------------- 196.RADIX ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 196
RE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 16, 83, 271.REG---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 123

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 386 of 391

register direct ------------------------------------------------------------------------62
register indirect ----------------------------------------------------------------------62
register indirect with displacement --------------------------------------------62
register indirect with index -----------------------------------------------------62
register indirect with post-increment------------------------------------------62
register indirect with pre-decrement ------------------------------------------62
register name-------------------------------------------------------------------------16
register name alias definition ------------------------------------------------------123
relative address ----------------------------------------------------------------------50
relative address section ---------------------------------------------------------50, 51
relative address section declaration -------------------------------------------112
relative address symbol ---------------------------------------------------------52
relative address value -----------------------------------------------------------52, 115
relative path --------------------------------------------------------------------------202, 203
relative value-------------------------------------------------------------------------52
REPEAT------------------------------------------------------------------------------272
repeat control instruction-----------------------------------------------------------83
repeat loop
automatic repeat loop generation function -----------------------------------271
extended instruction related to automatic repeat loop generation ---------272
repeat count ----------------------------------------------------------------------272
start address and end address---------------------------------------------------272
replacement character string definition-------------------------------------------217, 315
replacement symbol-----------------------------------------------------------------206.RES-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------149
reserved word------------------------------------------------------------------------16
return code to operating system ---------------------------------------------------281
Rn -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 62, 64, 68
Rn_BANK ---------------------------------------------------------------------------16
ROTCL -------------------------------------------------------------------------------71
ROTCR -------------------------------------------------------------------------------71
ROTL ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------71
ROTR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------71-ROUND -----------------------------------------------------------------------------330
rounding ------------------------------------------------------------------------------330
RS -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 83, 271
RTE -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------72, 85
RTS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------71, 85
S
S-type-format load module --------------------------------------------------------6, 7
sample program ---------------------------------------------------------------------338.SDATA ------------------------------------------------------------------------------133.SDATAB ----------------------------------------------------------------------------135.SDATAC ----------------------------------------------------------------------------138

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 387 of 391

.SDATAZ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 140
Se ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96
section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32, 45, 109
code section ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 45, 109
common section ----------------------------------------------------------------- 47, 109
data section----------------------------------------------------------------------- 46, 109
dummy section ------------------------------------------------------------------ 48, 109
memory location ---------------------------------------------------------------- 50
section attribute------------------------------------------------------------------ 109
section boundary alignment value -------------------------------------------- 109
section declaration -------------------------------------------------------------- 109
stack section --------------------------------------------------------------------- 48, 109
start and restart of section ------------------------------------------------------ 110, 111.SECTION --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 109-SECTION--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 302
section information listing--------------------------------------------------------- 345
section information listing output control------------------------------------ 302
section name------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16, 54, 109
section set---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
section set operation ------------------------------------------------------------ 32
separate assembly------------------------------------------------------------------- 57
SETRC ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66, 83, 272
SETS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77
SETT --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72
Sf ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96
SGR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16, 80
SH1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 283, 288
SH-1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 288, 330, 332
SH2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 283, 288
SH-2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 288, 330, 332
SH2E --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 283, 288
SH-2E -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 288, 330, 332
SH3 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 283, 288
SH-3 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 288, 330, 332
SH3DSP------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 106, 283, 288
SH3-DSP----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 288, 330, 332
SH3E --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 283, 288
SH-3E -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 288, 330, 332
SH4 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 283, 288
SH-4 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 288, 330, 332
SHAD -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
SHAL -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71
SHAR -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71
SHCPU environment variable ---------------------------------------------------- 283
SHDSP ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 283, 288

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 388 of 391

SH-DSP-------------------------------------------------------------------------------106, 288, 330, 332
SH-DSP instruction -------------------------------------------------------------91
shift instruction ----------------------------------------------------------------------71, 76
shift JIS code-------------------------------------------------------------------------13, 20, 40, 320, 322
SHLD ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------76
SHLL ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------71
SHLL2 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------71
SHLL8 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------71
SHLL16 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------71
SHLR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------71
SHLR2--------------------------------------------------------------------------------71
SHLR8--------------------------------------------------------------------------------71
SHLR16 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------71-SHOW -------------------------------------------------------------------------------304
sign bit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------24, 28
simulator/debugger------------------------------------------------------------------6, 7
single data move instruction -------------------------------------------------------93, 102
single precision ----------------------------------------------------------------------21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 61-SJIS ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------320
SLEEP --------------------------------------------------------------------------------72
sNAN ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------22-SOURCE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------298
source file ----------------------------------------------------------------------------281, 282
input source file------------------------------------------------------------------281
assembly of multiple source files----------------------------------------------57, 281
source program ----------------------------------------------------------------------3
assembly-language source program -------------------------------------------4, 6, 7
end ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------198
source program listing --------------------------------------------------------------342
blank line output to source program listing ----------------------------------191
source program listing header setting -----------------------------------------187
source program listing new page insertion -----------------------------------189
source program listing output control-----------------------------------------179, 181, 298, 304
source statement---------------------------------------------------------------------11
source statement across multiple lines ----------------------------------------15, 94
coding of source statement -----------------------------------------------------13
source statement structure ------------------------------------------------------11
SP -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16.SPACE-------------------------------------------------------------------------------191
SPC -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 76
SR -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 68.SRES ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------152.SRESC -------------------------------------------------------------------------------154.SRESZ -------------------------------------------------------------------------------156
SSR -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 76
stack pointer (SP) -------------------------------------------------------------------16
Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 389 of 391

stack section ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48
caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50
stack section declaration ------------------------------------------------------- 109
start address for simulation -------------------------------------------------------- 198
STC----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72, 77, 82, 84
STS ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72, 75, 79, 84
SUB ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
SUBC--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69-SUBCOMMAND------------------------------------------------------------------ 327
subcommand file name ------------------------------------------------------------ 327.SUBSTR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 254
SUBV -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
supplement debugging information file (ELF/DWARF supplement
information) ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 169, 292
SWAP -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 68
Sx ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96
Sy ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96
symbol ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12, 16, 63, 65, 68
absolute address symbol-------------------------------------------------------- 52
address symbol ------------------------------------------------------------------ 16
coding of symbol---------------------------------------------------------------- 18
constant symbol ----------------------------------------------------------------- 16
functions of symbol------------------------------------------------------------- 16
internal symbol ------------------------------------------------------------------ 18
replacement symbol------------------------------------------------------------- 206
relative address symbol--------------------------------------------------------- 52
symbol definition---------------------------------------------------------------- 53
symbol reference ---------------------------------------------------------------- 55
symbolic debug information ------------------------------------------------------ 171
symbolic debug information output ------------------------------------------ 171
system control instruction --------------------------------------------------------- 72, 75, 77, 79, 82, 84
Ttarget CPU --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106, 283, 288
TAS----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 70
term----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31
TRAPA------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66, 72, 85
TST ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66, 70
U
underflow boundary ---------------------------------------------------------------- 22
upper/lower-case letter distinction------------------------------------------------ 337
V
VBR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16, 68

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 390 of 391

X.XDATA------------------------------------------------------------------------------147
X data move instruction ------------------------------------------------------------93, 102
X0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 96, 101
X1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 96, 101
XDn -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 80
XMTRX ------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 80
XOR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------66, 70
XTRCT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------68
Y
Y data move instruction ------------------------------------------------------------93, 102
Y0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 96, 101
Y1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16, 96, 101
Z
ZERO ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------330
zero------------------------------------------------------------------------------------22, 25

Rev. 4.0, 09/98, page 391 of 391

SuperH RISC Engine Assembler User’s Manual
Publication Date: 1st Edition, August 1993
4th Edition, September 1998
Published by:Electronic Devices Sales & Marketing Group
Semiconductor & Integrated Circuits Group
Hitachi, Ltd.
Edited by:Technical Documentation GroupUL Media Co., Ltd.
Copyright © Hitachi, Ltd., 1993. All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.